Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
V300R008C00
User Guide
Issue
01
Date
2012-08-10
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
GENEX U-Net
V300R008C00
Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is network plan engineers.
Change History
01 (2012-08-10)
This is the first release of V300R008C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes.
Content
Description
ii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Content
Description
New.
Delete.
iii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Organization
1 Introduction to the U-Net
The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.
It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.
For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and
UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete
the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.
2 Installing the U-Net Software
This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by
the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you
can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall
it.
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the
neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and
evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual
network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating
base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters
and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on
network planning in different scenarios.
5 GSM Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell
parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your
network planning requirements.
6 UMTS Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and
scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to
meet you network planning requirements.
7 CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports
only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
iv
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Convention
Description
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Convention
Description
Boldface
Italic
Courier New
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Italic
[]
{ x | y | ... }
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
>
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
vi
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Key 1, Key 2
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Action
Description
Click
Double-click
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.
vii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Introduction to the U-Net.............................................................................................................1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 System Structure.................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net................................................................................................................................5
viii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
ix
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
xi
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
xii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
xiii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
xiv
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................545
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net............................................................547
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website............547
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area......................................................................548
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007
..............................................................................................................................................................................550
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains
Chinese Characters...............................................................................................................................................551
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly...........................................................................................553
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly
..............................................................................................................................................................................554
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System....................................................555
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure......................................555
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
xv
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
xvi
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
1.1 Overview
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic
information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan
the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,
capacity, and quality.
Positioning
Figure 1-1 shows the position of the U-Net on the network.
Figure 1-1 Position of the U-Net on the network
Entity
Description
Probe
CME
U-Net
Product Features
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, a flexible software architecture,
an advanced geographic information system (GIS), rich data resources, and user-friendly GUIs.
These features enable network planning engineers to improve the work efficiency significantly.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The U-Net supports the planning of neighboring cells, frequency, Physical Cell ID (PCI)
codes, and Physical Random Access Channels (PRACHs). In addition, it provides
professional LTE network optimization by incorporating the rich experience and advanced
technologies of both Huawei and leading operators.
l
Application Scenario
The U-Net is applicable in network deployment, network optimization, and network expansion.
During the network deployment, the U-Net helps you to properly plan the engineering
parameters, neighboring cell data, and frequency data of the network, thus providing guidance
for the actual project implementation. During the optimization and expansion of the network,
the U-Net helps you to optimize the network parameters and verify the optimization by
comparing the network performance before and after the optimization.
Table 1-1 describes the functions provided by the U-Net.
Table 1-1 Functions provided by the U-Net in different scenarios
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Function
Description
Site
deployment
After the area for deploying a site is specified, the site can be quickly
deployed on the map by using the base station template. By performing point
analysis, the U-Net can analyze the altitude height and clutter height along
the profile of the propagation path to adjust the site deployment.
Propagation
model
calibration
Network
parameter
planning
The U-Net helps users plan configuration parameters of the network, such
as parameters related to the neighboring cells, frequency, PCIs, PRACHs,
and TAs.
Prediction
The U-Net starts the prediction after importing the map and configuring
network data, service model, and propagation model. By analyzing the
prediction result, it evaluates the network performance.
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Function
Description
Capacity
simulation
After the traffic parameters are configured and the traffic map is set
according to the planning, the U-Net performs the simulation calculation
based on the traffic map. In capacity simulation, the U-Net analyzes the
throughput of the cell and the user. In addition, it analyzes the coverage of
common channels and traffic channels based on the specific network load
provided in the simulation calculation results.
Interaction
with the CME
You can obtain configuration parameters from the CME and then import
them to the U-Net for prediction and analysis. The analysis results provided
by the U-Net can be imported to the CME and then be delivered to the
network.
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Platform
This part provides the data management function and the basic common functions, such as
project management, GIS, NE modeling, service modeling, and propagation modeling. The
U-Net manages all the platform functions by using the project management function. In
addition, the project management function provides interfaces to support service functions
of different network systems.
System application
This part provides service functions for the actual network system, including parameter
planning, capacity simulation, prediction, and result analysis. The parameter planning
mainly involves the planning of neighboring cells, PCIs, frequency and PRACHs.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Name
Description
Menu bar
Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu
Bar.
Standard toolbar
Task toolbar
Explorer window
Event window
Map window
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the U-Net provides the main menu of the system, which is organized based on
the main functions of the U-Net to facilitate your operations.
Table 1-3 describes the menu bar of the U-Net and the corresponding functions.
Table 1-3 Description of the menu bar
Main Menu
Description
File
Edit
Window
Help
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Menu Item
Description
New
Create a project.
Open
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Menu Item
Description
Close
Close a project.
Save
Save As
Print Setting
Print Preview
Import Excel
Generate Template
Recent File
Description
Undo
Undo an operation.
You can undo the modifications in the GIS window. Note
that you can perform a maximum of three undo operations at
a time. You cannot undo the modifications in the property
window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Resource Usage
Find
Search NEs.
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Project Information
Standard Toolbar
Status Bar
Event
Legend
Simulation Curve
Description
Help Topics
View ESN
About License
Update License
About U-Net
Standard Toolbar
You can click an icon on the standard toolbar to perform the corresponding project-related
operation quickly.
Figure 1-4 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 1-8 describes the icons shown in
Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 Standard toolbar
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can choose Window > Standard Toolbar and determine whether to display the standard toolbar.
Description
Create a project.
Open a project.
Save a project.
Perform a print task.
View the U-Net software information.
Task Toolbar
You can click an icon on the task toolbar to quickly perform the operations related to the map
and point analysis.
Figure 1-5 shows the icons on the task toolbar. Table 1-9 describes the icons shown in Figure
1-5.
Figure 1-5 Task toolbar
Description
Calculate the path loss.
Forcibly calculate the path loss.
Stop calculating the path loss.
Start the point analysis.
Select a base station template.
Create base stations in batches.
Create a base station.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Icon
Description
Create a repeater.
Whether to display hexagons indicating cell coverage.
Select a rectangular area.
Center the map.
Refresh the map.
Select one item at a time.
Move a map.
Select a scaling.
Zoom in or zoom out on the map.
Zoom out on an area.
Measure the distance.
Draw a polygon.
Draw a line.
Draw a point.
Combine polygons.
Export a map to the Google Earth.
View detailed results.
For example, after performing the coverage prediction, you can select
a coverage prediction counter in the explorer window, click
, and
move the pointer to the map window to view detailed results of the
counter.
Draw a clutter analysis line.
Explorer Window
The Explorer window is in the left pane the main window. The Explorer window has four tab
pages: GEO, Data, Network, and Operation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
10
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Special Polygons
Polygons
Points
Lines
Map
NOTE
In normal cases, if you select or clear the check box of a node in the navigation tree, the information about the
node is displayed or hidden accordingly in the GIS window. For example, if you select the check box of
Polygons as shown in
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
11
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Propagation Models
CW Measurement
Drive Test
Antennas
Antenna Groups
Traffic Parameters
Traffic Map
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
12
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Site
Transceiver
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Navigation Tree
Description
Predictions
Simulations
Neighbor Planning
LTE PRACH
Planning
LTE Frequency
Planning
13
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
14
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Hardware Requirements
Table 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC.
Table 2-1 Hardware requirements
Config
uration
Item
Recommended Configuration
Minimum Configuration
CPU
P3 1GHz
Memor
y
2 GB
512 MB
Hard
Disk
15 GB at least
1 GB at least
Monitor
Miscell
aneous
Software Requirements
Table 2-2 lists the software requirements of the PC.
Table 2-2 Software requirements
Configurati
on Item
How to Obtain
Recommended
Configuration
Remarks
Operating
system (OS)
Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP2 or higher
Mandatory
Environment
components
l Microsoft .NET
Framework4.0 or higher
Mandatory
l Microsoft Windows
Installer3.1 or higher
Operating
software
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Mandatory
15
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Configurati
on Item
How to Obtain
Recommended
Configuration
Remarks
Mandatory
Mandatory
Prerequisites
NOTE
l The U-Net installation program is ready. The PC meets the installation requirements. For details, see 2.1
Preparation for the Installation.
l You have logged in to the operating system by using an administrator account because the U-Net software
must be installed by using an administrator account.
Context
The support website of Huawei provides the U-Net installation package. The installation
package is classified into four types.
l
If you use a 32-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet32 (exclude framework).
Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet32.
If you use a 64-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet64 (exclude framework).
Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet64.
Before installing the U-Net main program, you are advised to close all the running programs to
ensure successful installation of the U-Net main program.
This section takes a 32-bit operating system as an example to describe the installation procedure
of the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
16
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Download the installation package at the support website of Huawei.
Read the background information carefully and download the correct installation package.
Step 2 Double-click Huawei.UNet32.exe to display the setup wizard.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, select I accept the terms of the License Agreement.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the user information dialog box, enter the User Name and Company Name.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, select the required feature components.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 In the displayed dialog box, click Browse to set the installation path.
Step 11 After confirmation, click Install.
If you want to...
Then...
Display the Installer setup wizard Follow the prompts to install the software.
After the installation is complete, it is recommended that
you restart the PC. Then, perform Step 13 to check
whether the U-Net is installed successfully.
Display the .NET Framework
setup wizard
Then...
Table 2-3 describes the structure of the U-Net installation folder generated after the U-Net main
program is installed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
17
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Directory
Description
Adjust
Antenna
config
CoMP
IRC
iScript
Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM).
Measure
Report
Data
Gis
NbrPlanning
License
Prediction
Propagation
RF
RuleStore
Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM).
Simulation
ToolInfo
TSCPlannin
g
NetEntity
Network
Expansion
Help
Resource
Resources
Log
Temp
NOTE
The two folders are generated
only after the U-Net software
runs.
18
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Procedure
l
In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for self. The Domain
Authentication dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Domain Authentication
2.
3.
Click OK.
NOTE
If the entered domain account is valid, the U-Net will automatically update the license.
4.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
19
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
In the displayed dialog box, set parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters.
Table 2-4 Parameters in the Off-line License Application dialog box
Parameter
Description
3.
Click Next.
4.
5.
Click OK.
6.
After the license application succeeds, the U-Net automatically saves the license file to a
specified local path.
7.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Update License. The Update
License dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
8.
b.
Click Browse, and choose the save path of the license file.
c.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After loading the license, restart the U-Net and choose Help > About License to view the
remaining valid days of the license.
Prerequisites
When the U-Net is running, the read and write operations are performed on the U-Net installation
directory. Therefore, you must have complete read and write rights to the installation directory
before starting the U-Net.
Select the folder where the installation directory resides, right-click, and then choose
Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, view the permission information
on the Security tab page.
Procedure
l
Double-click the U-Net 3.8 shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U-Net software.
Alternatively, you can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or by doubleclicking U-Net software installation path/Huawei.UNet.exe.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
If ...
Then ...
21
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If ...
Then ...
An incorrect license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that the license
file is incorrect. Obtain the correct license file and
then load the license file. For details, see 2.3
Installing a License.
After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.
----End
Context
The license file, log files, temporary files, and saved U-Net project files are retained when the
U-Net is being uninstalled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Step 2 Select U-Net 3.8.
Step 3 Click Uninstall/Change. The interface for uninstalling the U-Net main program is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select Remove, and click Next >. Then, click Uninstall.
Step 5 After the U-Net main program is successfully uninstalled, click Finish.
You can restart the PC as required.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
22
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
23
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic
parameters are defined before capacity prediction.
3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation
Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as
follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and
allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall
network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net
generates a statistical report.
3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters
You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network
through the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
24
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
25
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data
Managing
propagation models
and bands
Adding a device
Setting traffic
parameters
Setting NE
parameters
Predicting network
performance
Planning PCI/
frequency/
neighboring cells/
PRACH/TAC
10
Creating a traffic
map
11
Performing
capacity simulation
Exporting network
planning results
12
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
26
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Project Templates
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
27
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Geographic Data
The U-Net uses two types of geographic data for planning and analysis, that is, Digital Elevation
Model (DEM) data and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data. Currently, the U-Net can import
geographic data files in Planet, Shape, MIF, or Vertical Mapper format.
The two types of geographic data are described as follows:
l
DEM data:
It is the data about the ground elevation, including the plane coordinates and the value of
the ground elevation.
DTM data:
It is the data about the altitude, including the plane coordinates and the value of the altitude.
The DTM data is similar to the DEM data. The difference is that the DEM data represents the
above-the-sea height, including the terrain height and the clutter height, whereas the DTM data
represents only the terrain height.
28
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-2 Relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types
Planet File
Type
Layer Type
Description
Vector File
Vector Layer
Clutter Height
File
Buildings Layer
(Layer of Clutter and
Building Heights)
Clutter Class
File
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
29
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Planet File
Type
Layer Type
Description
Altitude File
Heights Layer
(Altitude Layer)
Geographic
Projection File
Generally, the
geographic projection
file is stored in the
folder of altitude files.
The file name is
projection.
The .shx file saves the index information about the geographic data in the .shp file.
The .dbf (dBASE) file saves the feature information about each record.
The .grc file corresponds to the raster map with discrete values, such as the raster map of
clutter classes.
The .grd file corresponds to the raster map with continuous values, such as the raster map
of altitudes.
30
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
MIF file is a map file format developed by the MapInfo company. MIF files can be used on all
the platforms supported by the MapInfo software.
MIF files consist of .mif files and .mid files.
l
The .mif file consists of the file header and the data.
The file header contains the information about projection and boundary.
The data contains all the space data records and the coloring scheme for each record.
The .mid file records the index information about the space data in the .mif file.
The .mid file is optional. Not all the MIF files have .mid files.
The .hdr file is the header file of a .bil file and saves the information about a .bil file such
as the number of bytes, storage mode, number of rows, and number of columns.
The save path of a .bil file must contain an .hdr file that has the same prefix name as the .bil
file.
A .tab file in grid format specifies the table structure of map attribute data, including the
number of fields, field names, field types, field widths, index fields, and key space
information about corresponding layers.
The save path of a .tab file in grid format must contain the .grc or .grd file specified in
the .tab file.
You can open a .tab file in .txt format and query the name of the .grc or .grd file specified
in the .tab file.
The .tab file in vector format is a type of map file developed by the MapInfo company.
The save path of a .tab file in vector format must contain the .dat, .id, and .map files that
have the same prefix name as the .tab file.
For example, the save path of the River.tab file must contain the River.dat, River.id, and
River.map files.Otherwise, the U-Net cannot successfully import the geographic data in
this format.
Coordinate Systems
This section describes the basic concepts about projection, ellipsoid, and coordinate systems.
31
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
In the digital e-map folder, there are one or more sub-graphic layer folders including
Text, Vector, Building, Clutter, and Heights.
After including complete file types, a sub-graphic layer can be automatically recognized
by the system and then successfully imported. For example, the Heights graphic layer must
include an index file and the corresponding binary file.For the file types included in each
graphic layer, see Geographic Data.
After a projection file is put in the Heights folder, it can be automatically recognized by
the system.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Step 3 Choose Quick Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
32
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
33
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
to modify the file path or reStep 6 Optional: You can select a parameter in Figure 3-4 and click
set the parameter.For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Geographic Data
in Planet Format.
Step 7 Click OK. The import of the geographic data is complete.
The imported map files are displayed in the map window. On the GEO tab page, you can also
choose Map > Sub-graphic Layer on the navigation tree to view the imported graphic layer
data.
----End
34
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type and the file to be imported.
CAUTION
Before selecting a file type, read the description in Table 3-3 carefully. Otherwise, you may fail
to import the file.
Description
Satellitic
(navigation map)
l .png
l .bmp
l .jpg
Geometry
l .shp
l .mif
Text
Index File
Vector
l Index File
l .tab
Buildings
l Index File
l .bil
Clutter
l Index File
l .bil
l .grc
l .tab
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
35
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Graphic Layer
Type
Description
Heights
l Index File
l .bil
l .grd
l .tab
You can import .grc, .grd, .bil, .shp, and .mif files in batches.
Step 5 Click Open.
Step 6 If you import a data file of Satellitic layer, do as follows to set the geographic parameters.
1.
2.
Click Import.
----End
Prerequisites
Multiple geographic data files are imported to the U-Net.
Context
On the U-Net, the geographic area for calculation is defined as follows:
l
If only one geographic data file is imported, the U-Net performs calculation based on only
the geographic area corresponding to this file.
If multiple geographic data files are imported, geographic data of multiple resolution levels
is available for the overlapped geographic area.
When geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for a geographic area, UNet selects the appropriate resolution level according to the display sequence of the
geographic data in the Clutter/Heights/Buildings layers.
This section describes how to select the appropriate resolution level in the Heights layer.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
36
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In this case, the overlapped geographic data has multiple levels of resolution. In this case, select
the geographic data of a proper resolution level for service calculation.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, click before Map > Heights to expand the node.
The imported geographic data is displayed under Heights.
Step 3 Drag the layer of a resolution level to be used as the data source to top.
----End
Example
For example, the geographic data of multiple resolution levels (from 5 m to 40 m) have been
imported to the Heights layer. If the geographic data of three resolution levels (5 m, 10 m, and
20 m) are available for a calculation area and you want to use the top resolution level (5 m), drag
the layer of 5 m to the top, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Heights layer
37
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Procedure
l
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter > map name.
3.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-6.
The Clutter dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-6 Properties
4.
Click the Display tab, and set the display parameters for each clutter.
NOTE
For the heights layer, you can set three-dimensional effect by moving the Contrast slider in
the lower left corner.
5.
Click OK.
After the setting is complete, the map window is refreshed automatically. Then, you
can view the refreshed window.
2.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
38
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The geographic data has been imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 Choose Map > Clutter in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Clutter and choose Parameter
Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 Clutter Parameters Display
39
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
Use the projection mode and spheroid data in the Planet geographic data file.
Planet geographic data folder generally contains the geographic projection file. After Planet
geographic data is imported, the U-Net automatically identifies the projection mode and
spheroid data in the projection file. For details, see 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in
Planet Format Quickly.
NOTE
If the Planet geographic data folder does not contain the projection file or if the U-Net fails to identify and
import the projection file, set the projection mode and spheroid data by referring to the following
operations.
Use an existing projection mode and spheroid data in the coordinate system group.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the dialog box displayed, select the projection parameters and spheroid data file.
For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems.
If...
Then...
The required
projection mode and
spheroid data are
available
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
40
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
The required
projection mode and
spheroid data are
unavailable
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You must manually modify related parameters after setting the projection mode and spheroid
data.
1.
2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
41
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.
4.
Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data in the displayed dialog
box.
5.
Click OK.
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Context
On the U-Net, information about the coordinates is displayed in the status bar and the ruler.
Table 3-4 describes the four display modes of coordinates.
Table 3-4 Display modes of coordinates
Display Mode
Meaning
Example
xy reference frame
442472.51
xxdxxmxx.xxsS
1161945E
xx.xxxxxS
116.32E
-xx.xxxxx
116.32
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Step 3 Choose Map Setting from the shortcut menu.
If the geographic data is not properly imported, the right-click menu is not available.
Step 4 Select a proper coordinate display mode in Coordinate Style in the displayed dialog box.
BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
42
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, the value of
this parameter is 2 by default and cannot be changed.
l In other coordinate display modes, the value of this parameter is 6 by default and can be
changed as required.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
43
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In Figure 3-9, the polygon drawn by users are in blue; the propagation area of each activated
base station is in green. Propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice
the cell radius.
The green areas that intersect with the blue rectangle are considered in the prediction. For
example, though sites 11 and 9 are not included in the polygon, they are considered in the
prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 10 and 8 are
not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue
rectangle.
In Figure 3-10, the lines drawn by users are in purple; the external polygon of the lines is in
blue and the width of the polygon is set by users; the propagation area of each activated base
station is in green. The propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice
the cell radius.
The green areas that intersect with the blue polygon are considered in the prediction. For
example, though sites 4 and 2 are not included in the external polygon of the lines, they are
considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle;
sites 0 and 3 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect
with the blue rectangle.
44
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
To import a polygon represented by longitude/latitude, you must set the longitude/latitude
coordinate. For details, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Context
You can import an existing polygon or draw a new polygon.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Import
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported.
Step 5 Click Open and then import a polygon.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Export a polygon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box as shown in Figure 3-12, select a coordinate type and then
click OK.
45
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE
If you have not set the coordinate system, Longitude / Latitude grays out.
5.
In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name., and then
export a polygon.
If...
Then...
Two files are displayed under the saving path with the
suffix names of .mif and .mid.
The exported file contains projection information.
Four files are displayed under the file path with the
suffixes of .id, .dat, .map, and .tab.
The exported file contains projection information.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the coordinate system and export type.
5.
Click OK.
6.
In the displayed dialog box, select a path to save the exported polygon files.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
46
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add
Polygon from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the workspace to add points to the polygon one by one.
l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line,
indicating that you are drawing this line.
l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating
that you have finished drawing this line.
l You can right-click to exit.
Step 3 Double-click the last point to finish the creation of the polygon.
In the displayed U-Net dialog box, the geographic area covered by the polygon is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
View the clutter statistics of a polygon.
After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.
Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter
statistics of this polygon.
Procedure
Step 1 Draw a line.
1.
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add
Click
Line from the shortcut menu.
2.
3.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
47
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Select a line in the map window and press Del to delete the line.
5.
2.
3.
Right-click the line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the width of the extended polygon in the Strip Width area.
The width ranges from 0 to 1000 meters.
5.
Click OK.
Two lines are automatically extended to Strip Width/2 away from the drawn line on the
two sides of the drawn line, and these lines form an extended polygon.
Alternatively, you can right-click a line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut
menu to set the extended polygon of the line.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
View the clutter statistics of a polygon.
After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.
Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter
statistics of this polygon.
Editing Polygons
You can edit and combine polygons and modify their properties.
Procedure
l
Edit a polygon.
on the toolbar. The map window is selected.
1.
Click
2.
Edit a polygon.
If you need to...
Then...
Move a point
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
48
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
1. Select a side.
2. Right-click a position on the side where a point needs
to be added.
3. Choose Add Point.
A point is added to the side.
Delete a point
Move a polygon
1. Select a polygon.
2. Drag the polygon to a new position.
Delete a polygon
1. Select a polygon.
2. Press Del. Alternatively, right-click a polygon and
choose Delete Polygon from the shortcut menu.
If the polygon is referenced, for example it is
referenced by a vector-based traffic map, the system
prompts that the polygon cannot be deleted.
NOTE
l You can press Ctrl+Z, or choose Edit > Undo in the U-Net main interface to undo the
preceding operation.
l The modifications in the map window can be undone at most for three steps. The
modifications on the property page, however, cannot be undone.
2.
3.
Query and modify the polygon properties on various tab pages in the Polygon
Properties dialog box.
Query and modify the names of polygons on the Region Properties tab page.
Query and modify the point coordinates of polygons on the Points List tab page.
Query and modify the font color and character size on the Font tab page.
Query and modify the fill color and line color of polygons on the Color&Line tab
page.
4.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click OK.
Combine polygons.
1.
on the toolbar. Alternatively, click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Click
right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator from the shortcut menu.
2.
Select the polygons to be combined and the combination mode in the Polygon
Operator dialog box.
49
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.
Then...
Combine the
combination areas of
multiple polygons as a
new polygon
2. Select Exclude.
3. Select another polygon from the right area in the
Current Polygons window.
Click Run.
You can preview the polygon in the Preview area.
4.
Optional: Select the new polygon in the Output area. Click Rename to change the
name of the polygon.
After typing a new name, press Enter to change the name or Esc.
5.
l
Then...
Show/hide names of
polygons in batches
----End
50
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Clutter
Height
Vector
Building
Projection
File Path:
Indicates
the path of
the
projection
file.
Projection Path
Projection
Parameter
Benchmark Longitude
Benchmark Latitude
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Offset in Y Direction
Offset in X Direction
Projection
type
Projection type
Spheroid
Spheroid
51
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Bound
Type
Description
Value
If no geographic data is
imported, the value can only
be X/Y.
North
East
South
NOTE
l The value of the eastern
boundary must be greater
than the value of the
western boundary; the
value of the northern
boundary must be greater
than the value of the
southern boundary.
l You can also drag the
preview graph in the map
window to change the
graph position.
Transparency
Source File
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
52
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Value
Color
Value
Legend
Add To Legend
Transparency
Description
Value
Color
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Min Value
Max Value
Legend
Add To Legend
53
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Transparency
Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Max Value
Legend
Add To Legend
Transparency
Contrast
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
54
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Value
Color
Legend
Add To Legend
Parameter
Description
Value
Symbol
Legend
Add To Legend
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
Code
Clutter Class
Clutter Height
55
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Spatial Multiplex
Factor
Penetration Loss
Model Standard
Deviation
Shadow Corr
C/(I+N)Standard
Deviation
Description
Value
Find in
Selects a coordinate
system group from the
drop-down list.
New Group
Creates a coordinate
system group.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
56
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Delete Group
Deletes a coordinate
system group.
Name
Projection
Spheroid
Region
Indicates a region.
Creates a coordinate
system.
List of existing
coordinate
systems in the
selected group
New
Delete
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Name
Description
Value
57
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Projection
Parameter
Benchmark
Longitude
NOTE
The projection
parameters
vary according
to the
projection
mode.
Description
Value
Benchmark
Latitude
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Offset in Y
Direction
Offset in X
Direction
First Parallel
Second
Parallel
AzCentralLin
e
RectifiedToS
kew
Longitude
Zone
Projection type
Projection
type
Spheroid
Spheroid
58
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Length(m)
Line Width(px)
Line Type
Line Color
Comments
Description
Point Type
59
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
of polygons in the Polygon Properties dialog box or viewing the clutter information about
polygons in the Clutter Statistics of XXX dialog box.
Description
Name
Area
Comments
Description
Point Type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Polygon Order
Longitude
Latitude
60
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Color
Color.
Font
Font.
Size
Size.
Style
Style.
Example
Example of words.
Description
Color
Transparency
Transparence.
Lines Color
Lines Type
Line Width
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
ID
Clutter Class
Area(sq.km.)
61
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Percent
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
62
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Band
Cost-Hata
1500 MHz to
model
2000 MHz
(including the
Cost-Hata
HW model)
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
l Terrain
condition.
l Whether to
calculate the
diffraction.
l Clutter
statistics.
l A formula
corresponds
to a clutter.
l Limited by the
free space
loss.
l Loss in
municipal
areas.
Applicable to the
GSM1800,
UMTS, and LTE
technologies.
Not applicable to
highly populated
urban areas but
applicable to
common urban
areas, suburbs,
and villages. In
addition, the
antenna of the
base station must
be higher than the
surrounding
buildings.
Usually used for
prediction and
rarely used for
capacity
simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
63
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagatio
n Model
Band
Okumura
150 MHz to
Hata model
2000 MHz
(including the
Okumura
Hata HW
model)
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
l Terrain
condition.
l Whether to
calculate the
diffraction.
l Clutter
statistics.
l A formula
corresponds
to a clutter.
l Limited by the
free space
loss.
l Loss in
municipal
areas.
Applicable to the
GSM900, CDMA
2000, and LTE
technologies.
Not applicable to
highly populated
urban areas but
applicable to
common urban
areas, suburbs,
and villages. In
addition, the
antenna of the
base station must
be higher than the
surrounding
buildings.
Usually used for
prediction and
rarely used for
capacity
simulation.
SPM model
150 MHz to
(including the 2000 MHz
SPM900 and
SPM2G
models)
l Terrain
condition.
l Clutter
statistics.
l Effective
antenna
height.
There are six
methods of
calculating
the effective
antenna
height.
l The
diffraction
weight is
differentiated
in the case of
LOS or
NLOS.
l Limited by the
free space
loss.
l Loss and
weight of each
type of clutter
l Clearance area
of the receiver
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
64
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagatio
n Model
Band
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
ITURP model
(that is, 1238
model)
1800 MHz to
2000 MHz
l Distance
(LOS and
NLOS) and
frequency
l Propagation
scenarios are
classified into
LOS and
NLOS
scenarios.
Indoor scenarios.
l Margin of
slow fading
l NLOS
considers the
loss in
penetration
through
floors in
different
environments
. The loss
depends on
the number of
penetrated
floors.
l NLOS
considers the
distance loss
coefficient N.
COST231WIM
800 MHz to
2000 MHz
l Terrain
condition.
l Clutter
statistics.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
l The margin of
slow fading
depends on the
requirement
on the
coverage
probability
and the
standard
deviation of
indoor slow
fading.
l In the cases of
residential
buildings,
office
buildings, and
malls, N is 28,
30, and 22,
respectively.
Three parts are
Urban areas with
involved: free
a lot of high
space propagation buildings.
loss, rooftop-tostreet diffraction
and scattering
loss, and multishielding loss.
Configure
parameters for
each part.
65
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagatio
n Model
Band
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
KeenanMotley
Around 2000
MHz
l Distance and
frequency.
Indoor scenarios.
l Loss in
penetration
through
walls.
l Number of
walls.
l The impact of
multipath
propagation
is not
considered.
The
penetration
loss of each
wall is the
same.
Volcano
Urban
Volcano
Rural
Volcano
Indoor
NOTE
l The Volcano model is a third-party
model. To install this model, you need
to purchase the corresponding
software. Volcano 3.1.2 or later needs
to be installed for U-Net 3.8 or a later
version.
l After the Volcano model is installed,
you need to run the U-Net again. The
U-Net automatically detects the
installed Volcano model and loads the
Volcano model.
Densely
populated urban
areas with many
buildings.
Suburbs and rural
areas.
Indoor scenarios.
Context
Propagation model of different types has different properties, which, however, are configured
in the same way. This section takes the Cost Hata (default) propagation model as an example to
describe how to configure a propagation model.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
66
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Propagation Models > Cost231 Hata > Cost Hata (default).
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Properties
NOTE
If you do not want to directly modify the properties of the propagation model, choose Duplicate from the shortcut
menu and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.
Step 4 Set the properties of the propagation model in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description
of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model.
1.
On the General tab page, change the name and description of the propagation model.
2.
On the Parameters tab page, configure the parameters related to the propagation model
and set the formula.
3.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: You can set the parameters related to the propagation model in a centralized mode
by exporting and importing the parameters.
1.
2.
Right-click and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the parameters related to
the propagation model as an .xls file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
67
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.
Open the .xls file. You can set and modify the parameters.
4.
5.
Right-click and choose Import from the shortcut menu to import the parameters related to
the propagation model.
If the parameters are successfully imported, the system prompts that the import is successful
and updates the parameters based on the imported file.
If the parameters fail to be imported, check whether the information about the .xls file, such
as the heading, is correct and complete.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
After the propagation model is configured, you can assign it to cells for calculating the path
loss. For details, see 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models.
NOTE
If you have set the Volcano propagation model for a cell, you need to manually import the map data on the
Setting tab page of the corresponding model (the map data imported from U-Net does not take effect for
the Volcano propagation model). Otherwise, path loss calculation cannot proceed.
Prerequisites
l
Context
To shorten the calculation time, the U-Net enables users to assign the following propagation
models to each cell:
l
Main propagation model: high calculation accuracy and short calculation radius
Extended propagation model: low calculation accuracy and long calculation radius
If the calculation accuracy of the main propagation model is not defined, the U-Net calculates
the main propagation model based on the calculation accuracy of the imported geographic data.
In addition, the U-Net can calculate the extended propagation model only when the propagation
model, calculation radius, and calculation precision of the extended propagation model are
defined.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
68
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In normal cases, cells with the same parameters and in the same environment use the same
propagation model. You can group these cells together and assign a propagation model to
the cell group.
1.
2.
3.
Right-click the cell group and choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
The table of the selected cell group is displayed.
The property values of all the cells in the cell group are displayed in the table.
4.
Modify the values in each column (such as the Main Propagation Model column) to
ensure that parameter values of all the cells are the same.
TIP
You can set the parameters in the first row. Then, press Ctrl+D so that the parameter values
in the following rows are the same as those in the first row. In this way, parameter values of
all the cells are the same.
2.
3.
4.
Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. For example, for the LTE-FDD
network, click the LTE-FDDCell tab.
5.
Click
6.
Set propagation model parameters in the displayed Propagation dialog box. For
details, see Parameters on the Propagation Tab Page in the Repeater Properties
Dialog Box.
For a multi-mode network, you need to set Propagation Model on the tab pages
corresponding to each RAT.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
If the project is about a hybrid network, the Open Table menu has a submenu.
Step 4 Set bands in the window containing a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Setting Bands.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
69
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can also double-click the heading in the table, and set properties of all bands in the
Bandwidth Configuration dialog box.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
2.
3.
4.
5.
l
Set the value of Frequency Band on the tab page to assign the band to a cell.
You can also import and export band information in the window that contains a band table.
For detailed description of parameters, see 10.8 Managing Table Windows.
Description
Value
Name
Bandwidth(MHz)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
70
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Excluded Channels
ACIR
Band Number
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Frequency(MHz)
Actual Bandwidth(MHz)
Useable RB Num
Description
Value
Name
ARFCN
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(UL)s.
For example, if ARFCN is
set to 975-1023;0-124, you
need to set Frequency(UL)
(MHz) to 880.2;890.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
71
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(DL)s.
For example, if ARFCN is
set to 975-1023;0-124, you
need to set Frequency(DL)
(MHz) to 925.2;935.
Adjacent channel
interference ratio.
ACIR
Unit: dB.
Value range: real number that
is greater than 0.
Description
Value
Name
UARFCN(UL)
UARFCN(DL)
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(UL)s.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(DL)s.
ACIR
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Adjacent channel
interference ratio.
Unit: dB.
Value range: real number that
is greater than 0.
72
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Diffraction Loss
Method
Description
Value
Indicates whether to
consider diffraction
during path loss
calculation.
Available algorithms
are as follows:
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Available algorithms
are as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
General:
Sets the
parameters
for common
calculation.
Limitation to free
space loss
Formula
Indicates whether to
limit the loss in the free
space.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
73
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Lu
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the Rural/Small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6lg(f) - K7) x Hm
- (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
Indicates the frequency range. The value rang is from 1,500 MHz to
2,000 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
De
ns
e
ur
ba
n
49
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Ur
ba
n/
Su
bu
rb
46
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
74
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
Ru
ral
46
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
18
.
33
35
.
94
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
35
.
94
Hi
gh
wa
y/
Hi
gh
sp
ee
d
rai
lw
ay
46
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
18
.
33
40
.
94
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Diffraction Loss
Method
Description
Value
Indicates whether to
consider diffraction
during path loss
calculation.
75
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Description
Value
General:
common
calculatio
n
parameter
s
Formula
Indicates whether to
limit the loss in the free
space.
Description
Lu
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 1500 MHz to
2000 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10~
K16
Dens
e
urban
49.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Urba
n
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Subur
b
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Rural
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
High
way
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Highspeed
railw
ay
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
Diffra
ction
Calcul
Indicates whether to
consider building height.
Add building
height
77
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
ate:
parame
ters for
diffract
ion
calcula
tion
Clutter Loss
Calculate Method
l None
l Uniform
l Triangular
l Logarithmic
l Exponential
Diffraction Loss
Method
Indicates whether to
consider diffraction during
path loss calculation.
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Receiver on top
clutter
Gener
al:
comm
on
calcula
tion
parame
ters
Limitation to free
space loss
Param
eters:
calcula
tion
parame
ters
K1 - K7
78
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
K1
K2
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.
The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength
that changes with the distance.
K3
HTxeff
K4
Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this
parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss
K5
K6
HRxeff
K7
f(clutter)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Scenari
o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Dense
urban
27.425
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Urban
23.455
44.9
5.83
-6.55
79
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Scenari
o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Suburb
11.955
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Rural
3.065
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Highway
-3.455
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Highspeed
railway
-3.455
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Description
Value
Add building
height
Clutter Loss
Calculate
Method
Diffraction
Loss Method
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
80
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Effect Tx
Height
Calculate
Method
Description
Value
Receiver on
top clutter
General
:
common
calculati
on
paramete
rs
Limitation to
free space loss
Paramet
ers:
calculati
on
paramete
rs
K1~K7
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
K1
K2
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.
The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength
that changes with the distance.
81
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
K3
HTxeff
K4
Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this
parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss
K5
K6
HRxeff
K7
f(clutter)
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Dense
urban
12.13
44.9
5.83
Urban
12.12
44.9
5.83
Suburb
2.17
44.9
5.83
Rural
-11.39
44.9
5.83
Highway
-16.39
44.9
5.83
Highspeed
railway
-16.39
44.9
5.83
82
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Value
Diffra
ction
Calcul
ate:
param
eters
for
diffrac
tion
calcula
tion
Diffraction Loss
Method
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
The default value is None.
Effect Tx Height
Calculate
Method
Gener
al:
comm
on
calcula
tion
param
eters
Limitation to
free space loss
Formula
83
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Lu
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 150 MHz to
1500 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
Hi
gh
sp
ee
d
rai
lw
ay
64
.
77
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
-4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
De
ns
e
ur
ba
n
69
.
55
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
3.
2
11
.
75
4.
97
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
84
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
Ur
ba
n
69
.
55
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Su
bu
rb
67
.
55
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
-2
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Ru
ral
64
.
77
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
-4.
78
18
.
33
35
.
94
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Description
Value
Diff
ract
ion
Cal
cula
te:
para
met
ers
for
diffr
acti
on
calc
ulati
on
Indicates whether to
consider diffraction during
path loss calculation.
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
The default value is None.
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
85
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Gen
eral
:
com
mon
calc
ulati
on
para
met
ers
Formula
Description
Lu
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 150 MHz to
1500 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10~
K16
Dens
e
urban
72.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Urba
n
69.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Subur
b
61.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Rural
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
High
way
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Highspeed
railw
ay
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
87
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Value
Diffrac
tion
Calcul
ate:
parame
ters for
diffract
ion
calculat
ion
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
l AbsSpot
l Height above the ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
Gener
al:
commo
n
calculat
ion
parame
ters
Limitation to free
space loss
Formula
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
K2
K1
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Lf
88
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Lf
K2
K1
K4
K5
K6
NLOS
house
K4 + K5
x K6
-28
20
28
NLOS
office
K4 + K5
x (K6-1)
-28
20
30
15
NLOS
store
K4 + K5
x (K6-1)
-28
20
22
LOS
-28
20
20
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Description
Value
Indicates the
algorithm for
calculating the
effective height of
the transmitter
antenna.
Available algorithms
are as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At
Receiver
l Enhanced Slope
at receiver
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Angel between
incident-wave and
road
Building height
Unit: degree.
Unit: m.
89
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Distance between
buildings
Road Width
Description
Value
Indicates the
distance between
buildings.
Unit: m.
Unit: m.
In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd >0: Total = PL0 + PLrts + PLmsd
Description
PL0
PLrts
PLmsd
Lcri
Lbsk
Ka
l Hbs>Hroof: Ka = NKL6
l Hbs<=Hroof And d>=0.5 km: Ka = NKL7 NKL8*(Hbs Hroof)
l Hbs<=Hroof And d<0.5 km: Ka = NKL9-NKL10*(Hbs Hroof)*(d/0.5)
Kd
l Hbs>Hroof: Kd = NKL11
l Hbs<=Hroof: Kd = NKL12 NKL13*((Hbs -Hroof)/Hroof)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
90
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Kf
Hroof
Hbs
Hue
Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave.
Unit: degree.
K1
K2
K3
K1
K2
K3
NK1
NK2
NK3
NK4
NK5
NK6
NK7
Defa
ult
Valu
e
42.6
26
20
32.4
20
20
-16.9
10
10
20
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
91
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Description
Value
Available algorithms
are as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
General:
common
calculation
parameters
Limitation to free
space loss
Indicates whether to
limit the loss in the free
space.
Parameters
: calculation
parameters
K1-K5
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
K1
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
K2
K3
K4
K5
92
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
KeenanMotley
32.5
20
20
20
Description
Clutter
Clutter.
Propagation Model
Loss
Path loss.
Context
l
The U-Net allows you to import and export antenna data, including 2D and 3D data, as .txt
and .msi files.
Before importing antenna files, you can manually set the value of each parameter in the
antenna files. If a value in the antenna file is not within the specified value range, the antenna
file may fail to be imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu., as shown in Figure 3-14.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
93
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported..
l If data of a single antenna is imported, select the .txt or .msi file corresponding to the antenna.
l If data of multiple antennas is imported, select .txt or .msi files in batches.
l If an imported antenna name is the same as the name of an existing antenna, the U-Net adds
a number to the imported antenna name to distinguish the two antennas.
Step 5 Click Open. The Import Antenna File dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 Import Antenna File
l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower
part indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.
l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
94
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, configure antenna parameters. For details about the parameters, see
Table 3-15.
Table 3-15 Parameters for importing antenna files
Parameter
Description
File Name
Field Separator
Source
Destination
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Standard antenna field name used by the UNet. You can switch cell values in the dropdown list to configure the mapping between
user antenna attribute names and U-Net
antenna attribute names. <IGNORE>
indicates that the corresponding field
information is ignored.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 7 After the configuration, click Import to import the antenna file to the project.
NOTE
l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower part
indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.
l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name.. Then,
export the antenna data.
2.
3.
Right-click antennas and choose Export > Export File Type from the shortcut menu.
Then, export antenna data to files in batches.
2.
3.
Right-click an antenna and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Antenna
Properties dialog box is displayed.
4.
View the antennas in the window on the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern
tab pages.
If you have imported 3D data of an antenna, you can drag the slider in the lower left corner
of the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tab pages to change the value of
Attenuation, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
96
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
Create an antenna
1.
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
97
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
2.
In the antenna property dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box.
3.
Click OK.
2.
3.
Choose Add Group from the shortcut menu. The New Antenna Group dialog box
is displayed.
4.
Set the property parameters of the antenna group. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
2.
3.
Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Table dialog box is
displayed.
4.
Double-click the target cell, and then modify the antenna properties in the displayed
dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Antenna Config tab page, select an antenna type from the Antenna dropdown list.
5.
Click OK.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > TMA Equipment from the shortcut menu. The TMA
Equipment dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a TMA. For detailed description of parameters, see
Table 3-16.
NOTE
l After you set the TMA parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for
setting other TMAs.
l You can modify the original TMA parameter settings by referring to Table 3-16.
Meaning
Name
NoiseFigure(dB)
Gain(UL)(dB)
Loss(DL)(dB)
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the TMAs to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the
configured TMA, by default, the system does not consider the TMA during the calculation of
total loss.
1.
2.
3.
4.
next to
On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click
Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5.
6.
7.
Click OK.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
99
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Feeder Equipment from the shortcut menu. The
Feeders dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a feeder. For detailed description of parameters, see
Table 3-17.
NOTE
l After you set the feeder parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for
setting other feeders.
l You can modify the original feeder parameter settings by referring to Table 3-17.
Meaning
Name
dB/100m
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the feeders to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the
configured feeder, by default, the system does not consider the feeder during the calculation of
total loss.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click
next to
Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5.
6.
7.
Set the feeder length of the transmitter and the receiver in Feeder Length(m).
8.
Click OK.
100
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Site Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Site
Equipment dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a base station. For details about the parameters, see
Table 3-18.
NOTE
l After you set the base station parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row
for setting other sites.
l You can modify the original base station parameter settings by referring to Table 3-18.
Description
Name
NoiseFigure(dB)
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the base stations to all cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not
assign the configured base station, the system calculates the total loss based on the default base
station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the Antenna Config area of the displayed Transceiver Properties dialog box, click
following the Equipment parameter. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
101
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Manufacturer
Gain
Comments
Description
Angle()
Attenuation(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Angle()
Attenuation(dB)
102
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Beamwidth
Max Frequency
Min Frequency
Description
Group Name
No.
Antenna Name
Minimum Frequency
Maximum Frequency
Comments
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
103
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes
(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD.
Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank line marked with * in the table to set an MCS type, as shown in Figure 3-17. For
the detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-24.
Figure 3-17 MCS
Description
Index
Highest modulation
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Modulation Order
Coding Rate
104
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)
Step 5 Click
----End
Context
For an LTE-FDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo
Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If you need to...
Then...
Modify an existing
service type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
105
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Type
Service type.
l Voice: CS services.
l Data: PS services.
GBR
GBR service.
Priority
Activity Factor
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
MAC PDU(kbit)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
106
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Max Throughput
(kbit/s)
Min Throughput
(kbit/s)
Average Throughput
(kbit/s)
Transmission
Efficiency
Offset(kbit/s)
IBLER(%)
Body Loss(dB)
Body loss.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
107
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-FDD.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If...
Then...
Perform Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters
for the receiver type by referring to Table 3-26.
If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 3-26 Parameters for setting LTE-FDD receivers
Parameter
Description
Name
MCS Table
Mobility
MIMO
IBLER(%)
Channel Relativity
Transmission Mode
MCS Threshold
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
108
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
If you want to... Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
LTE-FDD.
type
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 3-27.
Modify an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal
LTE-FDD > the existing terminal type.
type
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify the parameters of the existing terminal type by referring to
Table 3-27
Description
Name
UE Category
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Support UL 64 QAM
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Noise Figure(dB)
Cable Loss(dB)
UL RS Offset(dB)
109
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
RB Number
Reception Equipment
Gain(dBi)
Number of Transmission
Antenna Ports
Number of Reception
Antenna Ports
Step 3 ClickOK.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
If you need to...
Then...
Create an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments.
environment type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new environment type by referring to Table
3-28 and Table 3-29.
Modify an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments
existing
> the existing environment type.
environment type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify the parameters of the existing environment type by referring
to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
110
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Compare
attributes of
multiple traffic
environments
Description
Name
User
Mobility
Density(Subscribers/km2)
Description
Clutter Class
Weight
% Indoor
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
111
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
112
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
If you want to... Then...
Create a user
type
1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click and then
choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles from the shortcut menu.
2. Set parameters for the new user type by referring to Table 3-30.
Modify an
1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic
existing user type
Parameters > User Profiles > An existing user type; right-click and
then choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Modify the parameters of the existing user type by referring to Table
3-30.
Compare
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles.
attributes of user 2. Right-click and choose Compare User Profiles Elements from the
types
shortcut menu. The User Profiles Compare dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-21.
NOTE
You can select two user types or more to compare in the Select User Profiles
area.
Description
Name
Priority
Service
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
113
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Terminal
Calls/hour
Duration(s)
Volume(DL)(Kbyte)
Volume(UL)(Kbyte)
114
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The U-Net provides six default mobility types: 30 km/h, 50 km/h, 60 km/h, 90 km/h, Fixed, and
Pedestrian.
Procedure
Step 1 Create or modify a mobility type.
If you want to...
Then...
Modify an existing mobility 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic
type
Parameters > Mobility Types > An existing mobility
type; right-click and then choose Properties from the
shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties dialog box is
displayed.
2. Modify the parameters for the existing mobility type by
referring to Table 3-31.
3. Click OK.
Description
Name
Average Speed(km/h)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
115
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
Not all the base station data files can be imported to the U-Net. The U-Net has certain
requirements on the format of the data files (site data, cell data, or transceiver data) to be
imported.
Generally, you can export base station data and the corresponding configuration file from
the U-Net, modify the relevant parameters, and then import the data to the U-Net for
analysis.
Procedure
Step 1 After exporting base station data and the corresponding configuration file, save or edit the data
for future use.
1.
2.
Then...
Export
transceiver data.
3.
In the Data Export dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box.
TIP
l You can click Save to save the current parameter configuration in the dialog box as a
configuration file.
l You can also click Load to load an existing configuration file. The U-Net exports data based on
the parameter configuration in the configuration file.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click Export.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Set the file type, saving path, and file name. Then, save the settings.
After the data export is complete, you can open the exported file, and view or modify the
base station data of the current project.
Step 2 Import the base station data and the corresponding configuration file into the U-Net to
automatically create base stations.
1.
2.
Then...
Import site
data.
Import
transceiver
data.
Import cell
data.
3.
To ensure that the data is successfully exported, see 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching
in the Field Mapping Area to check field matching.
4.
Optional: In the Data Import dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description,
see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.
5.
Click Import.
l After the data import is complete, the system creates base stations based on the base
station data and displays the base stations in the map window.
l If a file fails to be imported, modify the file based on the error information displayed
in the system.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Site.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
117
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can view or modify site properties. In addition, you can move or delete a single site.
1.
2.
Then...
The preceding operations can be performed in both the Explorer window and the map
window. This section describes the operations performed in only the map window.
l
You can also rank or group sites, audit the distance between two sites, and set the display
effect of a site.
1.
2.
3.
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
118
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
119
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
For example,
2.
l
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
2.
Set the properties in the LTE-FDD base station template. For details, see Parameters
for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
2.
3.
View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
120
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Prerequisites
The required base station template is created.
Procedure
l
2.
Click
3.
Move the mouse pointer to the target position in the map window.
4.
drop-
on the toolbar.
2.
Click
drop-
on the toolbar.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
121
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
When modifying site properties, you can change the position of the site by changing
coordinates. Alternatively, you can drag the site to a new position in the map window.
l
Export, search for, and group the site, set display properties of the base station.
Prerequisites
Base stations (including sites and cells) are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Create repeater equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Equipment > Repeater Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Repeater
Equipment window is displayed.
4.
To set the parameters of the new repeater equipment in the blank row, see Parameters for
Creating Repeaters.
l Enter the name of the new repeater equipment. After you enter the name, the system
creates a blank row to configure other repeater equipment.
l Click a property cell to change the value of the property.
2.
Choose Repeaters > New from the shortcut menu. The Repeater Properties dialog box
is displayed.
Alternatively, select the transceiver to which a repeater is added and then click
toolbar. Then, you can add a repeater directly in the map window.
on the
3.
To configure the properties of the repeater, see Parameters for Creating Repeaters.
4.
Click OK.
----End
122
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different
radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Prerequisites
A site has been created on the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set the transceiver parameters. For details, see Parameters for
Creating Transceivers.
Step 5 Click OK.
NOTE
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
2.
3.
Right-click Transceiver and choose Group By > Grouping Mode. The U-Net
automatically groups the transceivers based on the selected grouping mode. Two
levels of grouping are supported. Table 3-32 lists the default grouping modes of
transceivers.
NOTE
You can choose Group By > More and set to display the grouping dimension in Group By.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Grouping Mode
Description
None
Polygon
Calculation area.
Network Type
RAT.
Comments
Site Equipment
123
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Grouping Mode
Description
Active
Frequency Band
Scene
BSC ID
RNC Name
Alternatively, you can view common properties of a transceiver in the transceiver table and
manually set the property columns to be displayed in the table.
1.
2.
3.
Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The
Transceiver table table is displayed.
NOTE
Common engineering parameters such as Total loss DL, Total loss UL, Number of
Transmission Antenna Ports, Number of Transmission Antennas, Number of Reception
Antennas, and Input Total Loss are displayed in the Transceiver table table by default to
reduce the time required for selection.
4.
Right-click in the Transceiver table table and choose Display Columns from the
shortcut menu.
5.
In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, view the basic site parameters
in the Sites table and select or clear the check boxes of columns that need to be
displayed or hidden in the Sites table.
6.
Close the dialog box. The Transceiver table table is updated and displays the property
columns based on the preceding settings.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 On the LTE-FDDCell tab page, set LTE-FDD cell parameters, as shown in Figure 3-24.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells describes the parameters.
l Table 3-42 describes the Transmission Mode parameter.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
124
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
125
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Support Type
Position
NOTE
If no map is imported,
parameters in this area are
X and Y. If a map is
imported, parameters in this
area are Longitude and
Latitude.
Altitude(m)
Longitude
Latitude
Real
DTM
Comments
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
126
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Site
Hexagon Radius(m)
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Description
Antenna ID
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
127
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Description
Site Equipment
TMA
Feeder
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
to
Feeder Length(m)
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
128
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Description
Name
Noise Figure(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
129
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Time Delay(ms)
Description
Name
Donor
Equipment
Dx
Dy
Comments
Description
Air
Microwave
Optical Fibre
Antenna
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Model
Height(m)
130
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Azimuth
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Feeder
Type
Length(m)
Description
Active
Power(dBm)
Total Gain
Antenna
Downlink
Uplink
Model
Height(m)
Azimuth
Mechanical Downtilt
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
131
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Electrical Downtilt
Feeder
Type
Length(m)
Extended
Matrix
Extended
Matrix
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
132
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Support Type
Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Description
Transceivers
Model
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Transmission in the
Number of Antennas area
Transmission in the
Number of Antenna Ports
area
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
Comments
Description.
General tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
133
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
RS Power(dBm)
Actual Load(DL)
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
CCU IoT(dB)
CEU IoT(dB)
Frequency Band
Channel Index
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Transmission Mode
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
Channel Relativity
COMP
IRC
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
134
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Advance tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter
Description
Downlink
Uplink
Frequency Selectivity
Schedule
ICIC(UL)
ICIC(DL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
135
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Power Control
Target Load
Schedule Policy
TTI Bundling
VMIMO
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
136
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Power Offset tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)
SCH to RS(dB)
PCFICH to RS(dB)
PDCCH to RS(dB)
PHICH to RS(dB)
PA(dB)
CCU PA(dB)
CEU PA(dB)
PB(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
137
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagation Models tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Description
TM1
TM2
TM3
TM4
TM6
TM7
TM8
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
OL_Adaptive
CL_Adaptive
OL_CL_Adaptive
138
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Value
Description
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive
Description
GCI
Name
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Active
Frequency Band
Channel Index
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target Load(DL)
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Actual Load(DL)
RS Power(dBm)
139
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)
SCH to RS(dB)
PCFICH to RS(dB)
PDCCH to RS(dB)
PHICH to RS(dB)
Max Power(dBm)
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
High Speed
Radius(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
PB(dB)
140
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Schedule Policy
PCI
Scene
MCC
MNC
CI
DlEarfcn
UlEarfcn
TAC
Local Cell ID
Reselect Priority
PA(dB)
CCU PA(dB)
CEU PA(dB)
CCU IoT(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
141
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CEU IoT(dB)
Alpha
Po(dBm)
TTI Bundling
VMIMO
IRC
COMP
Channel Relativity
Transmission Mode
VIP
For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannot
be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilot
power.
Throughput(UL)
Throughput(DL)
Cell Throughput(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
142
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Cell Throughput(DL)
Density
Azimuth Locked
RsPower Locked
Fitness Threshold(%)
State
Advance Parameters
Neighbors list
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
143
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Propagation Models
Description
TM1
TM2
TM3
TM4
TM6
TM7
TM8
OL_Adaptive
CL_Adaptive
OL_CL_Adaptive
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
144
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Frequency Selectivity
Schedule
ICIC(UL)
ICIC(DL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
145
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Power Control
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Intra-frequency Neighbors
Inter-frequency Neighbors
Inter-RAT Neighbors
146
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Description
Antenna ID
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
147
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Description
Antenna ID
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
148
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Description
Site Equipment
TMA
Feeder
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
to
Feeder Length(m)
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
149
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 3-49 lists the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Table 3-49 Description of LTE-FDD prediction counters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
Best Server
DL RSRP
DL BandWidth RSRP
DL RSSI
DL PDSCH Signal
Level
Handover Area
DL PBCH Signal
Level
DL PCFICH Signal
Level
150
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Description
DL PDCCH Signal
Level
DL PHICH Signal
Level
DL ICIC Zone
Overlapping Zones
Pilot Pollution
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(DL)
Coverage by
Signal Level
(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
DL RS SINR
DL PDSCH SINR
DL RSRQ
Geometry
DL PBCH SINR
DL PCFICH SINR
DL PDCCH SINR
DL PHICH SINR
DL SCH SINR
UL RSRP
UL User RB Txpower
UL User Band
Txpower
151
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Description
UL PUSCH Signal
Level
UL ICIC ZONE
Uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area and
edge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.
UL RS SINR
UL PUSCH SINR
PRACH SINR
PRACH SINR.
PUCCH SINR
PUCCH SINR.
Coverage by
MCS(DL)
PDSCH MCS
Coverage by
Throughput
(DL)
DL MAC Peak
Throughput
DL Application Peak
Throughput
Coverage by
MCS(UL)
PUSCH MCS
Coverage by
Throughput
(UL)
UL MAC Peak
Throughput
UL Application Peak
Throughput
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
152
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
153
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Operation
Description
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
154
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Calculating the DL
RSRP to determine the
primary serving cell
Calculating counters
of the traffic channel
and common channel
based on the BIN
Displaying prediction
results
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base
station + Total loss of the base station
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the
base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 3-51 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
155
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
Penetration loss
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Calculation
156
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l
Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Calculate forcibly
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
Click
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
157
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
158
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.
If ...
Then ...
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Prerequisites
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
159
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 Skip this step if you have set the power offset of the PBCH channel relative to the RS channel
in the cell properties. Otherwise, proceed with the following steps.
1.
2.
3.
Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD
Prediction Counters.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.See Figure 3-29 For parameter
description, see Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
160
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 8 Click OK
Step 9 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
161
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog
box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the name of a prediction group by referring to Parameters in the New Prediction Group
Dialog Box, and select prediction items for the prediction group.
Step 5 Click Next. Then, set properties such as calculation area, prediction conditions, prediction bands
for new prediction groups by referring to Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog
Box.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Optional: If you clear Calculate Now in Step 4, right-click the prediction group and choose
Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number
of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view
details.
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
162
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Option
Description
Re-calculate counters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
163
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Option
Description
Set the properties of a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >
counter item.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as
display color on the Display tab page.
Lock or unlock counters in
batches.
----End
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Set the legend information and display properties of prediction.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Study Properties dialog box is displayed.
4.
5.
6.
Select the ranges to be displayed in the Legend window. See Figure 3-30.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
164
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
7.
Select Add to legend. The selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.
8.
Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the
Legend window.
9.
Click OK.
165
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The coverage prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Groupx and choose
Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu. The Statistics dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-31. The following takes the CDF chart for example.
Figure 3-31 Statistics
Step 3 Select a prediction counter, hot spot area, statistical area, and display mode from the Study,
Zone, Statistics Area, and Figure Style drop-down list boxes respectively.
The CDF, inverse CDF, or PDF chart of the selected counter is displayed in the Statistics dialog
box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
166
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l You can select a hot spot from the Zone drop-down list box to view the information about the selected hot
spot.
l For the LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best
Server, Handover Area, DL ICIC Zone, UL ICIC Zone, Pilot Pollution, PDSCH MCS, and PUSCH
MCS cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values. You can select
DL MAC Peak Throughput, UL MAC Peak Throughput, DL Application Peak Throughput, and UL
Application Peak Throughput to view the average throughput and cell edge throughput.
l For the GSM network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,
Coverage Area, and Coding Scheme cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are
discrete values.
l For the UMTS network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,
HSDPA CQI, Pilot Pollution, and Number Of Service cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because
their results are discrete values.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu to
save the chart in the Statistics dialog box. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif,
or .bmp format.
Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu to print the
chart in the Statistics dialog box.
Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the
chart in the Statistics dialog box to the clipboard.
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group.
1.
2.
3.
167
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
1.
2.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
168
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
model is allocated to a cell, the U-Net provides the profile terrain and calculates the path loss
between the cell and the receive point and the receive level of the corresponding terminal based
on the NE data and geographic data.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 Click
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell and a carrier from the Transceiver and Cell drop-down
list boxes respectively.
Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set cell edge coverage probability in the Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%) text box. If Indoor Coverage is selected, penetration loss will be taken into
account.
Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, select a capacity simulation group, terminal type, service type,
and mobility type from the Simulation Group, Terminal, Service, and Mobility drop-down
list boxes, respectively. Then, set neighboring cell PDSCH load and neighboring cell PDCCH
load in the Neighbour PDSCH Load and Neighbour PDCCH Load text boxes respectively.
Step 5 Switch back to the Profile tab page and click a point on the map.
The point changes to
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the pointer to move the
cursor.
NOTE
The preceding operations can also be performed on other tab pages including the Reception tab page. The
cursor, however, moves slowly on these tab pages. Therefore, you are advised to switch to the Profile tab
page to perform the operation.
Step 6 On the Profile tab page, view the terrain profile analysis information.
l The grey area indicates the terrain condition between the cell and the receive point.
The X-coordinate indicates the geographic distance between the cell and the receive point.
The Y-coordinate indicates the altitude.
l The blue ellipse indicates the Fresnel region of diffraction.
l The green straight line indicates the line-of-sight distance.
l Select DL RSRP to view the receive level of the terminal.
l Select Path Loss to view the path loss between the cell and the receive point.
l Propagation model used by the cell.
l Geographic distance between the cell and the terminal.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
169
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Right-click the profile and choose Link Budget from the shortcut menu. The Link
Budget dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter
Description of the Link Budget Window.
l
View detailed information about the propagation model. You can perform this operation
only when the propagation model is SPM.
Right-click the profile and choose Model Details from the shortcut menu. The Model
Details dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter
Description of the Model Details Window.
Copy a profile.
Right-click the profile and choose Copy from the shortcut menu. The profile is copied to
the clipboard of the operating system.
You can move the cursor to dynamically view the profile analysis information about any
point.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 Click
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.
Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%).
Step 4 Click a point on the map.
The point changes to
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the
cursor.
Step 5 On the Reception tab page, check the list of cells from which signals can be received and check
the strength of the received signal.
The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order
from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reception tab page. The cell that has the highest signal
strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.
Keep the cursor at the selected point. Then, you can check the received signal strength of each
cell.
Step 6 Query the statistical information about the selected point on the Results tab page.
The statistics are related to the following items:
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
170
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Step 3 Choose Export Results from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Export Results dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters
for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Step 5 Optional: You can also select the detailed export contents (such as the name, coverage area,
current coverage percentage, and cumulative coverage percentage) of each counter in Select
Statistics Data.
Step 6 Click Export.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The file is named in the
following format: Name of the prediction group_Name of the counter.Export format.
Procedure
l
Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
171
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
1.
2.
Then...
3.
4.
5.
Click Export.
The U-Net exports the detailed prediction results of Bin points based on the pilot power.
This function supports the single-mode network only.
You can specify the range of receive level and just export the detailed prediction results of
Bin points in the specified range.
1.
2.
Then...
NOTE
You can set ranges in the property dialog box corresponding to the DL RSRP.
3.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
172
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Click Export.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. By default, the file is saved
on the desktop of the PC and the default file name is PredictionData.csv.
The following contents are exported:
l
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Step 3 Select counters to be printed from the prediction group, as shown in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Select counters to be printed
173
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been
imported or created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose DT Adjust Feature Database from the shortcut menu. The
DT Adjust Feature Database dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 DT Adjust Feature Database
Step 4 Set related parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parameters
for Adjusting the DT Feature Database.
Step 5 Click Adjust.
----End
174
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
Feature data indicates the geographical distribution of network signals. On an actual network, a
geographical location may be covered by signals from multiple cells. The cell signal strength
and cell information are the signal features of this geographical location. The feature database
contains information about the signal features of all geographical locations on a network. The
MR positioning technology determines the geographical information about the actual
measurement points by matching the actual network coverage information and the feature
database.
This function exports Top N data of all received levels within each lattice and applies only to
single-mode networks.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.
The dialog box shown in Figure 3-34 is displayed.
Figure 3-34 Export By Top Signal Level
Step 4 Set the minimum value and the top N maximum receive levels to be exported.
Step 5 Click Export.
Step 6 Set the save path, file name, and file type. Then, export the preset information.
NOTE
l To use this function successfully, you must select the DL RSRP counter when creating a prediction
group, as shown in Figure 3-35.
l To export top N receive levels within the lattice, you must set TopNSignalLevel when creating a
prediction group. This parameter indicates that the top N maximum receive levels will be calculated,
as shown in Figure 3-36.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
175
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
176
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
177
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Group Name
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Description
Name
Resolution(m)
Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)
Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)
Polygon
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
With Shadow
Indoor Coverage
178
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Signal Level(DL)(dBm)
Signal Level(UL)(dBm)
Interference threshold.
Terminal
Terminal type.
Service
Service type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Description
Frequency Name
Channel Index
TopNSignalLevel
Description
Path
Select Polygon
Prediction
Group
Study
MIF
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
JPG
Statistics
179
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Select
Statistics
Data
Description
Name
Area(km2)
Percentage(%)
Cumulate(%)
Description
Name
Coverage Area(km2)
% of Calculate Area
% of Cumulate Calculate
Area
% of Coverage Area
or
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
% of Cumulate Coverage
Area
DefaultName
180
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
DT data file.
Selected from a drop-down list. The default
value is All.
Clutter Resolution(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
181
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Operation
182
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-56 describes the meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters.
Table 3-56 Meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters
Traffic
Parameter
Meaning
MIMO
MCS
Mobility
Type
Service
Type
Receiver
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
183
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traffic
Parameter
Meaning
Terminal
Type
l Depends on the
information about the
receiver.
l Used to set the UE type.
UE Type
Environme
nt Type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
184
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-57 describes the overall process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-39.
Table 3-57 Description of the overall process of capacity simulation
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Initializing cell
information
Determining
whether the
number of
current
snapshots is not
greater than the
total number of
snapshots
Collecting the
statistics of a
snapshot
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
185
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Number of
current
snapshots++
Processing
simulation
results
After the simulation of all the snapshots is complete, the UNet starts to process the simulation results and generates a
statistical report.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
186
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-58 describes the process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-40.
Table 3-58 Description of the simulation within a snapshot
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Generating UEs
UEs are generated one time for each snapshot and distribute
a certain number of UEs to the specified areas.
NOTE
The UE number and areas are determined by the traffic map.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Querying path
loss
Calculating
relevant
counters
187
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Determining
whether the
number of
current TTIs is
not greater than
the total number
of TTIs
Collecting the
statistics of a
TTI
Number of
current TTIs++
Processing
statistical results
within a
snapshot
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
188
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
189
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
190
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Admission load
control on the
uplink and
downlink
Uplink and
downlink
scheduling
Uplink and
downlink inter-cell
interference
coordination
(ICIC).
The LTE system uses the 1 x 3 x 1 frequency reuse mode. All the cells
can use all the bandwidths supported by the system. Therefore, intercell interference is unavoidable, especially for UEs at the border of a
cell.
Power control on
the uplink and
downlink
In ICIC, the edge band of a cell is separated from that of the adjacent
cell by means of frequency domain coordination. This reduces
interference between adjacent cells and improves performance of UEs
at the border of a cell.
The U-Net obtains the predicted channel status value based on the
scheduling, ICIC, and power control results. Then, the U-Net calculates
the SINR and uses it as the input value for the next TTI.
Processing of
statistical results
within a TTI
The U-Net starts to process the statistical result of the current TTIs only
when the number of current TTIs exceeds the threshold on the number
of TTIs.
NOTE
When the network is started, it is not stable. At this time, the instantaneous result
obtained by the U-Net cannot be used to evaluate the network performance. The
period from the time when the network is started to the time when the network
works stably is called the warm-up period of the network, which can be
automatically identified by the simulation function. To obtain accurate and stable
statistical data, collect statistics after the warm-up period ends.
Threshold on the number of TTIs = Warm-up period/Duration of the TTI =
Warm-up period.
191
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The SFN is supported only when the antenna configuration is 2T2R or 4T4R.
NOTE
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map > Traffic Map(User).
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. See Figure
3-43.
Figure 3-43 Select Map Type
192
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on
Environments.
Step 7 Click OK.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Vector.
Step 5 Click Create Map. The Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the vector-based traffic map, such as the number of subscribers for
each service, traffic characteristics, and weight of each clutter.
For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on
Vectors.
Step 7 Click OK.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
193
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
Context
CAUTION
Users that are generated on the basis of the cell coverage are distributed in the areas specified
by the calculated Best Server of each cell. Therefore, before creating a traffic map based on the
cell coverage, create the prediction group and complete the calculation of the Best Server
counter.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage.
Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the cell coverage-based traffic map. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage.
Step 7 Click OK.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
Traffic parameters are configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
194
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Group Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Set properties for the simulation group. For details, see Parameters for Creating Traffic
Simulation Groups.
Step 5 Determine whether to calculate the capacity simulation immediately.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
195
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE
l The simulation group is automatically locked after the calculation is complete, as shown in Figure
3-45.
l If you right-click the simulation group and choose Stop from the shortcut menu during the calculation,
the simulation group will not be automatically locked.
l The simulation group is automatically unlocked after its properties are modified.
l You can right-click a certain simulation group and choose Group Locked from the shortcut menu to
manually lock the simulation group. In this case, you need to manually unlock the simulation group
before performing capacity simulation again.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
196
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the simulation group is created, you can set display properties of this group.
1.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
2.
3.
Set the display color for each traffic status and determine whether to display the traffic
status in the legend window.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. The Group Results dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-46.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
197
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 View the capacity simulation statistics results for each radio access system in the displayed
dialog box. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation
Results of the Entire Network.
----End
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result
of the entire network is displayed.. See Figure 3-47.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
198
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view statistics on the service requirements and the actual services in
the entire network.
For details, see Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation
result of the specified hot spot.
l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before
viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.
Step 5 On the Sites(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in the entire network.
For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page.
Step 6 On the Cells(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in the entire network.
For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites
(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively to filter the statistical results.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
To export the simulation statistics on the sites and cells to a .txt, .xls, or .csv file, choose
Action > Export on the Sites(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively.
To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab
page. Then, you can perform the coverage prediction based on the capacity simulation
result.
For detailed operations, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity
Simulation Results.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a snapshot.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of a
single snapshot is displayed.
Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view the statistics on the service requirements and actual services in
a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Statistics tab page.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation
result of the specified hot spot.
l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before
viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.
Step 5 On the Sites tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Sites tab page.
Step 6 On the Cells tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Cells tab page.
Step 7 On the Mobiles tab page, view the simulation statistics on subscribers in a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Mobiles tab page.
NOTE
l You can also double-click a user icon on the map window to open the User Properties dialog box and view
the simulation statistics of a single subscriber. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User.
l Red indicates subscribers who are not satisfied with the network (offline, not connected, or no uplink
coverage). Green indicates subscribers who are satisfied with the network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
200
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites, Cells, and
Mobiles tab pages to filter the statistical results.
To export the simulation statistics on the sites, cells, or subscribers to a .txt, .xls, or .csv
file, choose Action > Export on the Sites, Cells, and Mobiles tab pages.
To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells tab page. Then,
you can perform the prediction based on the capacity simulation result.
For details, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation
Results.
Prerequisites
l
U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, and mobility type.
U-Net can display different types of simulation users in different shapes and colors on map.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Set legends and display properties of capacity simulation.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Symbol dialog box is
displayed.
4.
Select the dimension for classifying the simulation users from the Field Type drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 3-48.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
201
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Set the legend information for different types of simulation users, such as the shape and
color.
l Table 3-60 classifies the simulation users by user status.
Table 3-60 Simulation users in different states
State
Description
Satisfied
Users that are satisfied with the network quality, that is, users
that are not in any of the following states: ULNoCover,
DLNoCover, NoAccess, and Offline.
ULNoCover
DLNoCover
NoAccess
OffLine
Offline users.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Service
Description
LTEVideo
Conferencing
202
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Service
Description
LTEVoIP
LTEWeb Browsing
LTEFTP
When simulation users are classified based on user attributes, mobility rates, service types, or terminal
types, you can customize service types.
6.
7.
Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the checkbox before Simulations > A simulation group > Network
System > A snapshot > User type.
The map window displays the distribution of users in different states according to the preset
legend shapes and colors in a map.
NOTE
When you move the cursor pointer to a point representing a simulation user, a pop-up message is displayed,
where you can query the detailed information about the simulation user.
Follow-up Procedure
You can select an area by drawing a polygon and print the capacity simulation result of this area.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
203
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Graphics Result from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a counter in the Item area and a display mode in the Figure
Style area.
The CDF or PDF chart corresponding to the selected counter is displayed in the right pane.
NOTE
You can query the PDF or CDF chart of the following 21 counters: IoT(UL), IoT(DL), Load(UL), Load(DL),
Cell MAC Throughput(UL), Cell MAC Throughput(DL), Application Throughput(UL), Application
Throughput(DL), RS SINR(DL), Geometry, User MAC Throughput(UL), User MAC Throughput(DL), User
Application Throughput(UL), User Application Throughput(DL), User Service Time(UL), User Service Time
(DL), User Actual Power, Cell Actual Power, PUSCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, and Throughput.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Save Image
As from the shortcut menu.
To print a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Print from
the shortcut menu.
To copy a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Copy from
the shortcut menu.
To export the statistical results of a PDF or CDF chart as a .txt file, click Export Data.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.
Step 3 Click a point on the map.
The point changes to
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
cursor.
204
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, check the list of cells that can receive signals, strength of
received signals, and uplink or downlink status of the selected position based on the capacity
simulation results.
l In Simulation Group, select a capacity simulation group to simulate the uplink load and
downlink power of the network.
l In Terminal, select a terminal type.
l In Service, select a service type.
l In Mobility, select a mobility type.
The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order
from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reference Signal Reception tab page. The cell that has
the highest signal strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.
The uplink and downlink status of the selected point is displayed on the right of the tab page.
l The
icon indicates that the current channel meets the demodulation requirements.
l The
icon indicates that the current channel does not meet the demodulation requirements.
Double-click the two icons, you can query the detailed link information. For detailed description
of parameters, see Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window.
----End
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result
of the entire network is displayed.
Step 4 To apply the simulation results to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab page.
Step 5 Perform the prediction by referring to LTE-FDD Prediction.
----End
205
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
2.
3.
4.
In the Path area of the displayed dialog box, click Browse, and select a path.
5.
Select Simulation in Select Export Content to export the capacity simulation results.
6.
7.
Click Export.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
3.
4.
5.
Click Action.
6.
Select Export.
7.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a
snapshot.
3.
4.
5.
Click Action.
6.
Select Export.
7.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
206
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Polygon regions
Add
Description
Name
Description
Add
Delete
Name
Density
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
User Profile
User type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
207
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Density
User density.
NOTE
The value of this parameter determines the user
density on the Vector tab page.
ID
Clutter Class
Weight
% Indoor
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Prediction Group
Tx_ID
LTEFTP(UL)
LTEFTP(DL)
LTEVideo Conferencing(UL)
208
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
LTEVideo Conferencing(DL)
LTEVoIP(UL)
LTEVoIP(DL)
LTEWeb Browsing(UL)
LTEWeb Browsing(DL)
Description
Terminals area-Terminal
Terminals area-%
Mobility area-Mobility
Mobility area-%
Clutters area-ID
209
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
traffic map in the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box or modifying
parameters for an existing traffic map based on user locations.
Parameter
Description
Genera
l tab
page
User
Locati
on tab
page
Use as X and Y
Import
UserID
Longitude
Latitude
Priority
Indicates a priority.
The value is an integer. The larger the value, the
higher the priority.
Service
Terminal
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
210
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Mobility
LinkType
IsIndoor
Description
Name
Site Corr
UL FSS Environment
Number of Simulations
Number of simulations.
A larger number of simulations indicates a
more precise simulation result, but a longer
time is required for calculation.
Calculate Now
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Traffic map.
Select Polygon
Calculation area.
211
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Number of TTI
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
NetVersion
FailedSingleModeUserCount
SuccessSingleModeUserCount
SingleModeUserCount
SuccessMultiModeUserCount
212
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Load(UL)
Load(DL)
Throughput(UL)(Kbps)
Throughput(DL)(Kbps)
CAUTION
l The Request pane lists the total number of users attempted to access and the relevant
throughput, and the number of users attempted to access for each service and the relevant
throughput.
l The Result pane lists the total number of actually accessed users and the actual throughput,
and the number of actually accessed users for each service and the relevant throughput.
l If the throughput is less than 1 MB, the unit is kbit/s. If the throughput is greater than or equal
to 1 MB, the unit is Mbit/s.
Parameter
Description
Requ
est
area
Number of transmission
time intervals (TTIs).
Number of TTI
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Average Users
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb Browsing/
LTEVideo Conferencing
NOTE
The system collects the
number of users attempted
to access and relevant
throughput for services
such as LTEFTP,
LTEVOiP, and LTEWeb
Browsing. This section
generally describes theses
parameters because they
are the same for all services.
Standard Deviation
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)
Average Throughput
Demand(UL)
Users
Uplink
Downlink
Average Throughput
Demand(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
214
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Resul
ts area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)
Average Users
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(UL)
215
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(DL)
Service User
NOTE
The system collects the
number of accessed users
and relevant throughput for
services such as LTEFTP,
LTEVOiP, and LTEWeb
Browsing. This section
generally describes theses
parameters because they
are the same for all services.
Downlink
Downlink Standard
Deviation
Uplink
Uplink Standard
Deviation
Offline User
Failed User
216
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Actual MAC Throughput
Standard Deviation(UL)
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(UL)
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(DL)
217
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Site
Total Application
Throughput(UL)(kbps)
Total Application
Throughput(DL)(kbps)
LTEFTP(UL MAC)
(kbps)
LTEFTP(UL
Application)(kbps)
LTEFTP(DL MAC)
(kbps)
218
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
LTEFTP(DL
Application)(kbps)
LTEVoIP(UL MAC)
(kbps)
LTEVoIP(UL
Application)(kbps)
LTEVoIP(DL MAC)
(kbps)
LTEVoIP(DL
Application)(kbps)
LTEWebBrowsing(UL
MAC)(kbps)
LTEWebBrowsing(UL
Application)(kbps)
LTEWebBrowsing(DL
MAC)(kbps)
LTEWebBrowsing(DL
Application)(kbps)
LTEVideoConferencing
(UL MAC)(kbps)
LTEVideoConferencing
(UL Application)(kbps)
LTEVideoConferencing
(DL MAC)(kbps)
LTEVideoConferencing
(DL Application)(kbps)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Site
Transceiver
Cell
Tx Power(dBm)
IoT(UL)(dB)
219
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Load(UL)
Load(DL)
MAC Throughput(UL)
(kbps)
Application Throughput
(UL)(kbps)
MAC Throughput(DL)
(kbps)
Application Throughput
(DL)(kbps)
Service User
Indicates the number of users that can gain access to cell services.
Offline User
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Users
Downlink
220
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Breakdown per
service
LTEFTP/
LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb
Browsing/
LTEVideo
Conferencing
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Uplink
Max Throughput
Demand(DL)
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)
Max Throughput
Demand(UL)
Average Throughput
Demand(UL)
Users
Number of subscribers
attempting to gain access to each
service in a single snapshot.
Downlink
Uplink
Max Throughput
Demand(DL)
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)
221
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
NOTE
The system collects
the number of
subscribers
attempting to gain
access and relevant
throughput for
services such as
LTEFTP,
LTEVoIP,
LTEWeb
Browsing, and
LTEVideo
Conferencing
respectively. This
section generally
describes theses
parameters because
they are the same
for all services.
Result
area
Max Throughput
Demand(UL)
Average Throughput
Demand(UL)
Number of TTI
IsConvergence
Whether a snapshot is
converged.
Total Connected
Users
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Users
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)
222
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)
Breakdown per
service:
LTEFTP/
LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb
Browsing/
LTEVideo
Conferencing
Users
Downlink
NOTE
The system collects
the number of
accessed
subscribers and
relevant throughput
for services such as
LTEFTP,
LTEVoIP,
LTEWeb
Browsing, and
LTEVideo
Conferencing
respectively. This
section generally
describes theses
parameters because
they are the same
for all services.
Uplink
Standard Deviation
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)
Standard Deviation
Standard Deviation
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)
223
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Breakdown per
unsuccessful
reason
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Standard Deviation
DLNoCover User
ULNoCover User
NoAccess User
Offline User
Distribution of downlink RS
SINR.
Distribution of downlink
PDSCH SINR.
224
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
ID
ID of a user.
Group Name
SnapShot Name
Name of a snapshot.
User Profile
User type.
Service
Service type.
Terminal
Terminal type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Connection State
Connection status.
There are five user states: Satisfied,
ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, and
OffLine.
Best Server
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Link Type
Indoor
Link Loss(UL)(dB)
Link Loss(DL)(dB)
RSRP(UL)(dBm)
RSRP(DL)(dBm)
225
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
IoT(DL)(dB)
PDSCH MCS
PUSCH MCS
Uplink MCS.
MIMO Mode
Tx Power(dBm)
RS SINR(DL)(dB)
PUSCH SINR(dB)
PDSCH SINR(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Layer
ID
ID of a user.
Link Type
226
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indoor
Mobility
Mobility type.
Service
Service type.
Terminal
Terminal type.
Best Server
Link Loss(UL)(dB)
Link Loss(DL)(dB)
RSRP(UL)(dBm)
RSRP(DL)(dBm)
IoT(DL)(dB)
PDSCH MCS
PUSCH MCS
Uplink MCS.
MIMO Mode
Tx Power(dBm)
RS SINR(DL)(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
PUSCH SINR(dB)
PDSCH SINR(dB)
227
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Number Pts
Dist.
Alt.
Tot.H.
Clut.
Effective Tx Height
Receiver Height
Antenna Gain
Diffraction Loss
Effective Rx Height
Clutter Loss
NOTE
Some parameters in the Model Details window are not described in this table. They are calculated according to
the propagation model.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceiver
Receiver
Distance
Max Power
228
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Path Loss
Penetration Loss
Equipment Loss
Description
Down
link
Received Reference
Signal Level
PDSCH C/(I+N)
Bearer
PDSCH Peak
Throughput
Received PUSCH
Power
Transmission Power
PUSCH C/(I+N)
Bearer
PUSCH Peak
Throughput
Uplin
k
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
229
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Principles
In LTE-FDD mode, you can search for cells according to cell groups. That is, you can determine
the ID of the corresponding cell group based on the SSCH and determine the specific cell ID
based on the PSCH.
Considering the networking capability, a large number of cell IDs is preferred. In the case of a
large number of cell IDs, sufficient and high-performance SCHs are required to support quick
and accurate query of cell IDs. Therefore, in LTE-FDD mode, each cell ID group consists of
three cell IDs. Therefore, the number of cell IDs is a multiple of 3. The number of downlink
scrambling codes is a multiple of 6. In the case of the WCDMA network, the maximum number
of cell IDs is 512. Therefore, to ensure that the number of cell IDs is a multiple of both 3 and 6,
the recommended number of cell IDs is 504.
The number of PCIs is limited. Therefore, in the actual network, PCI reuse is unavoidable. The
reuse of PCIs, however, may result in interference when the distance between the cells sharing
the same PCI is excessively small. By using the PCI planning function on the U-Net, you can
plan PCIs properly for cells, reducing the interference between intra-frequency and co-PCI cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
230
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In the circle, the line between base station A and base station B, that is, line AB, is the diameter.
Line DG and line EF run parallel with line AB. The length of either line OD or OE is one third
of the length of line AB.
The number of base stations involved in the gray area represents the number of layers between
base station A and base station B. If no base station is involved in the gray area, base station A
and base station B are called layer-0 base stations.
When the PCIs of cells are divided by 6 and the remainders are the same, these cells have
the same mode 6. For example, the PCI of cell A is 16 and the PCI of cell B is 10; the
remainder of dividing 16 by 6 is 4 and the remainder of dividing 10 by 6 is also 4. Therefore,
cell A and cell B have the same mode 6.
When the PCIs of cells are divided by 3 and the remainders are the same, these cells have
the same mode 3. For example, the PCI of cell A is 8 and the PCI of cell B is 5; the remainder
of dividing 8 by 3 is 2 and the remainder of dividing 5 by 3 is also 2. Therefore, cell A and
cell B have the same mode 3.
Planning PCIs
The U-Net provides the function of planning PCIs. The planning results can be applied to the
cells.
Prerequisites
A base station is created.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: View the PCIs of existing cells.
1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
231
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
3.
Right-click and choose Open PCI Codes from the shortcut menu. The PCI Planning
Display window is displayed. View the PCIs of existing cells.
Step 5 In the LTE PCI Planning dialog box, set the planning parameters. For parameter description,
see Parameters for Planning PCIs.
Step 6 Select whether to expand the PCIs based on the existing PCIs.
If...
Then...
Perform Step 7.
Follow-up Procedure
After the PCI planning is complete, you can filter, verify, apply, and export the PCI planning
result. For details, see Managing the PCI Planning Result.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
232
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The PCI planning is complete.
Procedure
l
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
233
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
234
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Planning PRACH
You can manually plan the PRACH parameters of one or multiple cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
235
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
A base station is created.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) for each cell.
The default value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) is 2 for each cell.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click OK.
Step 2 Importing the existing neighboring relationships. For details, see Importing Neighbor
Relationships.
Step 3 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PRACH Planning.
Step 5 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Planning the PRACH.
Step 7 Click Run.
The planning results of the PRACH parameters are displayed in a pane under the U-Net main
interface. You can check the planning results. For details about the parameters, see Parameters
for Viewing PRACH Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
236
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
237
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency.
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
l
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
239
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-52 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,
see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
240
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
Then...
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 3-53.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 3-54.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
241
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
the shortcut menu..
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
shortcut menu..
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
242
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
243
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
244
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
245
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the fullfrequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.
l
Planning EARFCNs
The U-Net provides the automatic frequency planning function. You can enable the U-Net to
automatically assign EARFCNs to each cell based on different frequency reuse modes to avoid
improper frequency configuration, which greatly reduces the interference problems caused by
improper frequency configuration.
Prerequisites
The frequency band information is set.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.The Parameter Setting dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-55.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
246
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 On the General tab page, select the target area in Select Area.
l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in
the area.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction,
and set whether to match cases.
Step 5 Set the minimum interference distance in Min Interference Distance(km).
Step 6 Select a frequency reuse mode in Frequency Reuse Pattern. The default reuse mode is 1x1,
Static ICIC.
Step 7 On the Frequency tab page, select a band in Frequency Band and available ARFCNs in
Channel Index.
You can select only one ARFCN in 1x1 frequency reuse mode and three ARFCNs in 1x3
frequency reuse mode.
Step 8 Click Run.
After the frequency planning is complete, open the window of frequency planning results. For
detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning
Results.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
247
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
To export the frequency planning results, click Export in the window of frequency planning
results.
To apply the frequency planning results to the cells, click Commit in the window of
frequency planning results.
Prerequisites
A base station is deployed. ARFCNs are assigned to each cell under the base station.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.
Step 3 Choose Frequency Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Frequency Statistics dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Set a band in Frequency Band and ARFCNs in Channel Index.
Step 5 Click Find to check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of the specified ARFCN.
Step 6 Click Geometry to query the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells on the map.
Click Color to set the display colors of intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
248
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been
imported or created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose Calculate LinkLoss Matrix from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 3-56.
Figure 3-56 Calculate LinkLoss Matrix
Step 4 Set related parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box. For details about
parameters, see Setting Link Matrix Parameters.
Step 5 Click Run to start calculating pass loss, as shown in Figure 3-57.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
249
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Planning Cells
This section describes how to plan cells. Before planning cells, you need to set parameters such
as analysis and simulation areas, number of iteration times, weight of each coverage counter
(such as RSRP and RS SINR), and maximum adjustment range of the antenna tilt angle,
azimuth, and reference signal transmit power.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell
Planning dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-58.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
250
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 Set cell planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see
Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After creating an LTE cell planning group, you can plan LTE cells.
1.
2.
Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click Groupx and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu. The system starts
planning LTE cells, as shown in Figure 3-59.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
251
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE
You can right-click Groupx and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating LTE cell groups.
When LTE cells are being planned, the Event Viewer window in the lower part of the U-Net main window
displays the planning progress.
After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result. For details, see Viewing the LTE
Cell Planning Result.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click Groupx and choose Result from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell Planning:
Groupx dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, view the LTE cell planning result, as shown in Figure 3-60. For
details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
252
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE
On the Cells tab page in the LTE Cell Planning :Groupx dialog box, click Commit to apply the cell
planning result to each cell.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
253
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Methods Select
Co-Site Distance(m)
Azimuth Difference ()
Resolution(m)
Compute Shadowing
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
254
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Handover Threshold(dB)
Area
Description
Force Symmetry
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
255
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Force Symmetry
Table 3-73 Parameters displayed on the Inter-RAT tab page (available in multi-mode)
Parameter
Description
Co-Site Distance
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
CAUTION
On the General
tab page, if you
select a network
planning mode
(Methods
Select), the
required
conditions must
be met so that you
can use the cell as
a neighboring
LTE-FDD cell for
blind handover.
For details, see
Table 3-74.
256
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Co-Transceiver
Azimuth
Difference
Best Handover
Area Percent
SourceNetType
To
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Handover
Threshold(dB)
Max Number
257
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
The Topology
mode is selected
A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTEFDD cell must meet the following conditions:
l Co-Site Distance
l Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference
l Min Signal Level(dBm)
The Prediction
mode is selected
A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTEFDD cell must meet the following conditions:
l Co-Site Distance
l Best Handover Area Percent
NOTE
If there are repeaters, neighboring cell planning based on predictions is not
supported.
Topology +
Prediction is
selected
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Display Links
Inter-RAT Neighbors
258
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Intra Frequency
Inter Frequency
Inter-RAT
Intra Technology
Paired Inter-RAT
Add To Legend
Transparency
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
259
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
Percentage of Reference
Neighbors
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
None
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
260
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause
Confirm
Description
Site
Transceiver
Frequency
Bandwidth
11 Result
dialog box
Edge Frequency
(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
261
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Edge Frequency
(DL)
13 Result
dialog box
Channel Index
Description
Available PCI
Area
Filter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
262
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Topology
Prediction
Resolution(m)
Indoor Coverage
Description
Cell Name
Existing Code
Suggest Code
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the suggested PCI value and also the planned PCI
value.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
263
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Confirm Code
Description
Filter Target
None
No condition is specified.
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
Description
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
264
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Propagation Radius
Coverage Radius
Resolution(m)
Indoor Coverage
Area
Description
Cell Name
HighSpeed
Preamble Format(4)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
265
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Ncs
Indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zerocorrelated cells allocated for a cell.
The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACH
planning. The possible values of this parameter are as
follows:
l High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82,
100, 128, 158, 202, or 237.
l Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59,
76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or 419.
Cell Radius
Reuse Distance(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
266
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Display Links
Description
Same PCI
Same MOD3
Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 3 with the
specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.
Same MOD6
Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 6 with the
specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.
Description
Site Name
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Site ID
Site ID.
Longitude
Longitudinal coordinate.
Latitude
Latitudinal coordinate.
Altitude(m)
Altitude.
Comments
Comments on a site.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
267
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Support Type
Description
Resolution (m)
With Shadow
Indoor Coverage
Terminal
Service
Polygon Region
Select DT Data
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
268
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
DL RSRP Threshold(dBm)
DL RS SINR Threshold(dBm)
UL RSRP Threshold(dBm)
UL RS SINR Threshold(dBm)
269
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Search Range
Iteration Count
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Analysis Area
270
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Simulation Area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Iteration
Site Name
Site ID
Cell Name
Local Cell ID
Original Azimuth()
Optimized Azimuth()
Original RS Power(dBm)
Optimized RS Power(dBm)
Original Tilt()
Optimized Tilt()
271
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Original Fitness
Optimized Fitness
Description
Iteration
Fitness
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
DL RSRP
DL RS SINR
UL RSRP
UL RS SINR
Iteration
Compare Iteration
272
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
273
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic
parameters are defined before capacity prediction.
4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation
Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as
follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and
allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall
network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net
generates a statistical report.
4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters
This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the
LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
274
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
275
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data
Managing
propagation models
and bands
Adding a device
Setting traffic
parameters
Setting NE
parameters
Predicting network
performance
Planning PCI/
frequency/PRACH/
neighboring cells
10
Creating a traffic
map
11
Performing
capacity simulation
Exporting network
planning results
12
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
276
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Project Templates
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
277
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
278
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes
(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD.
Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.
Step 4 Click the blank row (marked with *) in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-3. For information
on how to set a new MCS type, see Table 4-2.
Figure 4-3 MCS
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Index
279
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Highest modulation
Modulation Order
Coding Rate
Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)
Step 5 Click
----End
Context
For an LTE-TDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo
Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If...
Then...
Modify an existing
service type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
280
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Type
Service type.
l Voice: CS services.
l Data: PS services.
GBR
GBR service.
Priority
Activity Factor
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
281
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
MAC PDU(kbit)
Max Throughput
(kbit/s)
Min Throughput
(kbit/s)
Average Throughput
(kbit/s)
Transmission
Efficiency
Offset(kbit/s)
IBLER(%)
Body Loss(dB)
Body loss.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
282
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-TDD.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If...
Then...
Perform Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters
for the receiver type by referring to Table 4-4.
If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 4-4 Parameters for setting LTE-TDD receivers
Parameter
Description
Name
MCS Table
Mobility
MIMO
IBLER(%)
Channel Relativity
Transmission Mode
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
283
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
MCS Threshold
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
If...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type
LTE-TDD.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. See Table 4-5 to set the parameters of a new terminal type.
Modify an
1. On the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal
LTE-TDD > Existing Terminals.
type
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. See Table 4-5 to modify the parameters of an existing terminal type.
Meaning
Name
UE Category
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
284
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Support UL 64 QAM
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Noise Figure(dB)
Cable Loss(dB)
Supported BF
UL RS Offset(dB)
RB Number
Reception Equipment
Gain(dBi)
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
285
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For
details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see
3.6.6 Setting User Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
286
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
287
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
For example,
l
2.
Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting
LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
2.
3.
View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
288
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 On the LTE-TDDCell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the LTE-TDD
cell, as shown in Figure 4-6. For parameter description, see Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells.
Figure 4-6 LTE-TDDCell
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
289
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Support Type
Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Model
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Transmission in the
Number of Antennas area
290
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Transmission in the
Number of Antenna Ports
area
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
Comments
Description.
General Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
RS Power(dBm)
Actual Load(DL)
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
CCU IoT(dB)
CEU IoT(dB)
Frequency Band
Channel Index
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Transmission Mode
DwPTS-GP-UpPTS
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
291
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Frame Configuration
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
Channel Relativity
COMP
IRC
Advance Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Downlink
Uplink
Frequency Selectivity
Schedule
ICIC(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
292
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
ICIC(DL)
Power Control
Target Load
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
293
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Schedule Policy
TTI Bundling
VMIMO
Power Offset Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)
SCH to RS(dB)
PCFICH to RS(dB)
PDCCH to RS(dB)
PHICH to RS(dB)
PA(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
294
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CCU PA(dB)
CEU PA(dB)
PB(dB)
Propagation Models Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Description
TM1
TM2
TM3
TM4
TM6
TM7
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
295
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Value
Description
TM8
OL_Adaptive
CL_Adaptive
OL_CL_Adaptive
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive
Description
GCI
Name
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Active
Frequency Band
Channel Index
296
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Target Load(UL)
Target Load(DL)
Actual Load(UL)
Actual Load(DL)
RS Power(dBm)
PBCH to RS(dB)
SCH to RS(dB)
PCFICH to RS(dB)
PDCCH to RS(dB)
PHICH to RS(dB)
Max Power(dBm)
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
High Speed
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Radius(m)
297
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Preamble Format
Preamble format.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Priority
PB(dB)
Schedule Policy
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
PCI
Scene
MCC
MNC
CI
DlEarfcn
UlEarfcn
TAC
Local Cell ID
Reselect Priority
298
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
PA(dB)
CCU PA(dB)
CEU PA(dB)
CCU IoT(dB)
CEU IoT(dB)
Alpha
Po(dBm)
TTI Bundling
Multi-user Beamforming
VMIMO
IRC
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
299
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
COMP
Channel Relativity
Transmission Mode
VIP
Throughput(UL)
Throughput(DL)
Cell Throughput(UL)
Cell Throughput(DL)
Density
Azimuth Locked
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
300
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
RsPower Locked
Fitness Threshold(%)
Comments
Description.
State
Advance Parameters
DwPTS-GP-UpPTS
Frame Configuration
Neighbours list
Propagation Models
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
301
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
TM1
TM2
TM3
TM4
TM6
TM7
TM8
OL_Adaptive
CL_Adaptive
OL_CL_Adaptive
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
302
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Frequency Selectivity
Schedule
ICIC(UL)
ICIC(DL)
Power Control
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
303
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Description
Intra-frequency Neighbors
Inter-frequency Neighbors
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
304
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Site
Hexagon Radius(m)
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Description
Antenna ID
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
305
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Description
Site Equipment
TMA
Feeder
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
to
Feeder Length(m)
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
306
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 4-15 lists the LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Table 4-15 Description of LTE-TDD prediction counters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Category
Counter
Meaning
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
Best Server
DL RSRP
DL BandWidth RSRP
307
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Meaning
DL RSSI
Handover Area
DL ICIC Zone
Pilot Pollution
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(DL)
Coverage by
Signal Level
(UL)
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
DL RS SINR
PDSCH SINR
DL RSRQ
PDCCH SINR
UL RSRP
UL User RB TxPower
UL User BandWidth
TxPower
UL ICIC Zone
UL RS SINR
PUSCH SINR
308
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Meaning
Coverage by
MCS(UL)
PUSCH MCS
Coverage by
MCS(DL)
PDSCH MCS
Coverage by
Throughput
(UL)
UL MAC Peak
Throughput
UL Application Peak
Throughput
Coverage by
Throughput
(DL)
DL MAC Peak
Throughput
DL Application Peak
Throughput
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
309
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
310
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Operation
Description
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
311
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step
Operation
Description
Calculating the DL
RSRP to determine the
primary serving cell
Calculating counters
of the traffic channel
and common channel
based on the BIN
Displaying prediction
results
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base
station + Total loss of the base station
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the
base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 4-17 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
312
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
Penetration loss
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Calculation
313
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l
Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Calculate forcibly
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
Click
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
314
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
315
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.
If ...
Then ...
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Prerequisites
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
316
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Prerequisites
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog
box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
317
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD
Prediction Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number
of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view
details.
Procedure
l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Context
The method of analyzing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as
that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction
Result.
318
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The methods of exporting and printing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode
are the same as those for networks in the LTE-FDD mode.
Procedure
l
Export prediction results in batches. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in
Batches.
Export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. For details, see Exporting the Detailed
LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point.
Print prediction results in batches. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in
Batches.
----End
Context
The method of verifying the feature database based on DT data in LTE-TDD is similar to that
in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on
DT Data.
Context
The method of exporting the feature database in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
319
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Group Name
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Description
Name
Resolution(m)
Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)
Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)
Polygon
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
With Shadow
320
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indoor Coverage
Description
Signal Level(DL)(dBm)
Signal Level(UL)(dBm)
Interference threshold.
Terminal
Mobility type.
Service
Service type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Description
Frequency Name
Channel Index
Context
The method of capacity simulation for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for
networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.
321
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For PCI planning, see 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning.
Context
The method of planning PRACH parameters for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same
as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning.
Context
The method for planning neighboring cells in LTE-TDD network is the same as that in LTEFDD network. For details, see 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning.
Context
For frequency planning, see 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.
322
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For details about the LTE cell automatic planning, see 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE
Cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
323
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
324
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You
must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.
5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
5.8 GSM Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning
After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You
can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each
cell one by one.
5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet.
5.11 TSC Planning
This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created,
you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based,
and VAMOS-based TSC planning.
5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
325
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
326
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data
Managing
propagation models
and bands
Adding a device
Setting traffic
parameters
Setting NE
parameters
Planning
neighboring cells
Predicting network
performance
10
Planning TSC
11
Exporting network
planning results
327
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,
UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Project Templates
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
328
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
329
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM.
Step 3 Right-click and then choose MOS from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-3. The MOS
Table dialog box is displayed
Figure 5-3 MOS
Step 4 Set related parameters to create or modify MOS types by referring to Table 5-2.
You can set the new MOS type in the blank line (marked with *) of the dialog box.
Table 5-2 Description of parameters in the MOS Table dialog box
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Meaning
Index
330
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Mobility
C/(I+N)-MOS
Context
The U-Net provides three default GSM service types: GSMVoice, GSMMobile Internet
Access, and GSMMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
Option
Description
If...
Then...
Modify an existing service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
Services > GSM > An existing service type.
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by
referring to Table 5-3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
331
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Name
Type
Priority
Body Loss(dB)
Activity
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
FER(%)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
332
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Max Throughput
(kbit/s)
Min Throughput
(kbit/s)
Average Throughput
(kbit/s)
Transmission
Efficiency
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to
100.
Offset(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
333
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > GSM.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If you need to...
Then...
Go to Step 5 directly.
Step 5 Double-click the first column of the receiver and set property parameters in the displayed dialog
box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 5-4.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 5-4 Parameters for setting GSM receivers
Parameter
Meaning
Name
LinkType
Mobility
IBLER(%)
Demodulation
FER(%)
C/(I+N) Threshold
C/(I+N)-Throughput
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
334
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
If you need to...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
type
GSM.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 5-5.
Modify an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal
GSM > An existing terminal type.
type
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table
5-5.
Meaning
Name
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Noise Figure(dB)
Cable Loss(dB)
Attenuation(dB)
Gain(dBi)
Reception Equipment
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
335
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Code Configuration
Technology
Number of TimeSlots(DL)
Number of Timeslots(UL)
Support Half-Rate
Support DTX
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
336
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
337
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Such as
2.
Set properties of the BTS template. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
2.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
338
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio
links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of
different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-6.
Figure 5-6 Properties
Step 4 Set the properties of GSM cells on the GSMTRX tab page. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
339
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Support Type
Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Comments
Description.
Model
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Total Loss(DL)
340
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Total Loss(UL)
Description
Max Power(dBm)
IoT Target(UL)
DTX
TRX Power(dBm)
Target Load(DL)
Target Load(UL)
Frequency Band
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
341
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Active
Frequency Band
Target Load(DL)
Target Load(UL)
DTX
IoT Target(UL)
Max Power(dBm)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
MS Max Power(dBm)
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
SynchroRank
TRX Power(dBm)
Coverage Type
Mapping Cell
Use In Capability
Scene
MCC
MNC
LAC
CI
342
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CGI
RAC
BSC ID
BTS ID
Local Cell ID
BSC Name
Module Type
Module Info
TRX Number
Swap Status
Hopping Mode
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Frame Offset
BSIC
BCCH
TCH
MAIO
AFPFreqNum
HSN
MA
MAIO Plan
TSC
343
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Comments
Description.
Propagation Models
Description
Name
Site
Hexagon Radius(m)
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Description
Antenna ID
Power Ratio
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
344
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Description
Site Equipment
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
345
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
TMA
Feeder
to
Feeder Length(m)
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 5-10 lists the GSM prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
346
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Counter
Description
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
DL BCCH Signal
Level
Best Server
DL BCCH CIR
DL Service CIR
Geometry
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(UL)
UL Service CIR
Coverage
Area
Analysis
Coding Scheme
MOS
Handover Area
Coverage Area
Coverage by
Throughput
(DL)
DL PDCH
Application Peak
Throughput
Coverage by
Throughput
(UL)
UL PDCH
Application Peak
Throughput
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(DL)
347
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
348
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
349
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Calculating the DL
BCCH to determine
the primary serving
cell
Calculating counters
of traffic channels and
common channels
based on the Bin
points
Displaying prediction
results
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
350
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 5-12 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Table 5-12 Meanings of factors in the formulas
Factor
Meaning
Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Antenna fading of a
terminal
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
Penetration loss
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
351
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l
Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Calculate forcibly
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
Click
352
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
353
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.
If ...
Then ...
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Prerequisites
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
354
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction
Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.For parameter description, see
5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
355
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group.
1.
2.
3.
2.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
356
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Procedure
l
Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.
Then...
357
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
3.
4.
5.
Click Export.
Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to
single-mode networks.
You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a
Bin point within the range.
1.
2.
Then...
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level from
the shortcut menu.
When you perform prediction calculation, select at least one of the preceding two
indicators. Otherwise, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.
The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage
area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the
cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.
The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified
range.
5.
l
Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable
only to single-mode networks.
1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click Export.
358
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box
as shown in Figure 5-11 is displayed.
4.
Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N
records to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
6.
After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.
NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include DL BCCH Signal
Level when you create a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-12.
l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of
TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-13. This value
specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
359
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.
The exported contents mainly include:
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
360
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
Prerequisites
l
The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or
created.
Context
The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
Context
For detailed operations of exporting the feature database in GSM, see Export the top N records
of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result
by Bin Point.
361
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
l
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
362
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-14.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
363
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3 Parameters
for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
364
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
Then...
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 5-15.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 5-16.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
the shortcut menu..
After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the
original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
365
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export
mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
366
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
367
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Description
Group Name
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
368
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Calculate Now
Description
Name
Resolution(m)
Handover Threshold(dB)
Polygon
With Shadow
Indoor Coverage
Description
Signal Level(dBm)
Terminal
Service
Mobility
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
TopNSignalLevel
369
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
TrxDTXFactor
Description
Methods Select
If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the
two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Force Co-Site As
Neighbor
Co-Site Distance(m)
Reference Existed
Neighbors
Azimuth Difference()
Consider Handover
Statistics
Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for
saving the handover data.
370
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Planning Weight
Handover Statistics
Weight
Resolution(m)
Compute Shadowing
Handover Threshold(dB)
Area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
371
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Force Symmetry
Table 5-18 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring
cell planning)
Parameter
Description
SourceNetType
To
Handover Threshold(dB)
Max Number
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Display Links
372
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Description
Intra Frequency
Inter Frequency
Inter-RAT
Intra Technology
Paired Inter-RAT
Add To Legend
Transparency
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
373
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 5-21 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
Percentage of Reference
Neighbors
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
None
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
374
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Table 5-23 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause
Confirm
375
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
performance can be improved. The IBCA feature improves channel quality by reducing the
interference traffic. Therefore, TSCs need to be configured to ensure the minimum of
interference traffic of the same TSC station. Manual configuration of TSCs is complicated. In
this case, the U-Net is required.
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown
in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.1 Parameters for
TSC Planning.
Step 5 Click Run.
l You can right-click TSC Planning on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from the
shortcut menu to stop the planning of TSCs.
l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For
details, see 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
376
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
Set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes.
1.
2.
On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click TSC Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed TSC Display Options dialog box, set the color of cells displayed in
the map window for different TSC planning modes. For details, see 5.12.5 Parameters
for Setting the TSC Display Effect.
5.
Click OK.
Prerequisites
The TSC planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure
5-18.
Figure 5-18 Open TSC Table
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
377
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
378
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
379
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
The parameters MA and MAIO Plan have been configured for the cells.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation
tree.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-20 Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.3 Parameters for
IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.
Step 5 Click Run.
l You can right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor on the Operation tab page and choose
Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells.
l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For
details, see 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring
Cell Planning.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
380
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation
tree.
NOTE
You need to select IBCA Interference Neighbor so that the IBCA interference neighboring cell
relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The
IBCA Interference Neighbor window is displayed.
Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.
If...
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
381
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
382
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Planning on
Planning based on
Data
Planning area
You can select all the cells in an area or click
Filter and select only the cells to be planned
in the area.
If you select Full Map, all the cells on the
map are to be planned.
You can set filter criteria such as Direction
and Match case in the Filter dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
383
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Site Name
Name of a site.
Site ID
ID of a site.
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
CI
ID of a cell.
Existed TSC
Existing TSC.
Existed VamosMainTSC
Existed VamosSubTSC
Suggest TSC
Suggest VamosMainTSC
Suggest VamosSubTSC
Confirm TSC
Confirmed TSC.
By default, the value of Confirm TSC is the
same as that of Suggest TSC. You can change
the value manually.
You submit the value of Confirm TSC as the
TSC planning result.
Confirm VamosMainTSC
Confirm VamosSubTSC
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
384
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Data
Area
Planning area.
You can select all the cells in an area or click
Filter and select only the cells to be planned
in the area.
If you select Full Map, all the cells on the
map are to be planned.
You can set filter criteria such as Direction
and Match case in the Filter dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
385
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CI
ID of a cell.
Co Traffic
Adj Traffic
Interference Relation
Interference relationship.
This parameter is used to determine cofrequency and adjacent frequency
interference, co-frequency interference, and
adjacent frequency interference based on
interference probability.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
TSC
Vamos TSC
Co-TSCCell Color
Co-TSCPair Cell
Related-TSC Cell
386
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
387
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
6.8 UMTS Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells
After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network.
You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for
each cell one by one.
6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning
This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for
differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code
planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and
vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios
such as scrambling code check and network deployment.
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis
This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement
report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze
the live network.
6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis
Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the
UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.
6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the
U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
388
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
389
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
No.
Procedure
Description
Importing
geographic data
Managing
propagation models
and bands
Adding a device
Setting traffic
parameters
Setting NE
parameters
Planning
scrambling codes/
Planning
neighboring cells
Analyzing Network
Capacity
Expansion/
Analyzing
Measurement
Reports
10
Predicting network
performance
11
Exporting network
planning results
390
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Project Templates
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
391
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
392
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS and choose MIMO from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 6-3. The MIMO Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Figure 6-3 MIMO
Step 4 Modify the parameters of an existing MIMO type. Alternatively, click a blank line marked with
an asterisk (*) in the dialog box to set parameters for the new MIMO type.
For detailed description of parameters of MIMO types, see Table 6-2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
393
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Name
TX_ANTENNAS
RX_ANTENNAS
SM_SUPPORTED
SM_GAIN(dB)
Step 5 Click
----End
Context
The U-Net provides six default UMTS service types: UMTSVideo Conferencing,
UMTSVoice, UMTSHSDPA, UMTSHSUPA, UMTSMobile Internet Access, and
UMTSMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If you need to...
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
394
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Name
Body Loss
Priority
Type
Is VOIP
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
R99 Bearer
HSDPA
HSUPA
395
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Activity
FER(%)
Min Throughput(kbit/s)
Average Throughput(kbit/
s)
Transmission Efficiency
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0
to 100.
Offset(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
396
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If you need to...
Then...
Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the heading of the receiver and set properties in the displayed dialog box. For
detailed description of parameters, see Table 6-4.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 6-4 Parameters for setting UMTS receivers
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Mobility
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
MIMO
IBLER(%)
Retransmission Gain(dB)
397
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Demodulation
Bearer Index
Ec/Nt(dB)
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
If you need to...
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
UMTS.
type
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 6-5.
Modify an
1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS > Existing
existing terminal
Terminal from the navigation tree.
type
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table
6-5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Max Tx Power(dBm)
398
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Gain(dBi)
Cable Loss(dB)
Compressed Mode
Noise Figure(dB)
Attenuation(dB)
Rake Factor(DL)
Reception Equipment
Frequency Band
Technology
HSDPA UE Category
HSUPA UE Category
Number of Transmission
Antennas
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
399
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Description of the parameters in the HSUPA bearer table
Parameter
Description
Indicates the index of the HSUPA bearer table. Its value is greater
than 0.
Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The value ranges from
1 to 32767.
Min Spreading
Factor
Highest modulation
Step 5 Click
----End
400
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-7.
Table 6-7 Description of the parameters in the HSDPA bearer table
Parameter
Description
Index
CQI
Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer. The unit
is bit. The default value is 0.
Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer. The unit is bit/s. The default
value is 0.
Highest Modulation
Step 5 Click
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose R99 Bearer from the shortcut menu. The UMTS R99 Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-8.
Table 6-8 Description of the parameters in the R99 bearer table
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
401
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Nominal Rate(UL)
Nominal Rate(DL)
CE Used Num(UL)
CE Used Num(DL)
Spreading Factor
(UL)
Spreading Factor
(DL)
Step 5 Double-click the column heading of the bearer table to open the UMTS Service Quality dialog
box. Then, set relevant parameters, and click OK.
NOTE
l Each bearer service in the R99 bearer table must be set. That is, each row in the table must be set.
l Mobility: set mobility.
l UL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the uplink traffic channel for the related mobility.
l DL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the downlink traffic channel for the related mobility.
Step 6 Click
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA UE
Category Table window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-9.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
402
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Category
TTI 2ms
Highest Modulation
Step 5 Click
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA UE
Category Table window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-10.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
403
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Category
Highest Modulation
MIMO Support
Step 5 Click
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
404
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
405
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Such as
l
2.
Set properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
2.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
406
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the properties of UMTS cells on the UMTSCell tab page in the displayed dialog box, as
shown in Figure 6-6. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of UMTS Cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
407
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Name
Support Type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
408
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Description
Transceivers
Comments
Description.
Model
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Transmission in Number of
Antennas area
Reception in Number of
Antennas area
Transmission in Number of
Antenna Ports area
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Pilot Power(dBm)
CCH Power(dBm)
409
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Actual Power(dBm)
HS-SCCH Power(dBm)
Target Load(DL)
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from
0 to 1.
Max Load(DL)
Max Load(UL)
SHO Threshold(dB)
UL Rake Factor
Frequency Band
ARFCN
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Cell Type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
410
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the UMTS Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Description
Name
Active
Frequency Band
ARFCN
Target Load(DL)
Target Load(UL)
Cell Type
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
CCH Power(dBm)
411
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
HS-SCCH Power(dBm)
Max Load(DL)
Max Power(dBm)
Max Load(UL)
Pilot Power(dBm)
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
SHO Threshold(dB)
Actual Power(dBm)
UL Rake Factor
Load Factor(UL)
HSUPA Load(UL)
Scrambling Code
Scene
MCC
412
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
MNC
CI
CGI
RNC ID
LAC
RNC Name
Swap Status
Comments
Remarks
Neighbors list
Propagation Models
Description
Name
Site
Hexagon Radius(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
413
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Antenna ID
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Equipment properties.
For details, see Table 6-14.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
414
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Site Equipment
TMA
Feeder
to
Feeder Length(m)
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
415
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 6-15 lists the UMTS prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Table 6-15 Description of UMTS prediction counters
Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
CPICH RSCP
Best Server
UE RSSI
Handover Area
Pilot Pollution
Number Of Service
DL Noise Rise
Ec/Io
CPICH Ec/Io
Eb/Nt(UL)
UL DPCH Eb/Nt
Eb/Nt(DL)
DL DPCH Eb/Nt
HSDPA
Coverage
HS PDSCH Ec/Nt
HSDPA CQI
HSDPA Peak
Throughput
E DPDCH Ec/Nt
HSUPA Peak
Throughput
Coverage
Area
Analysis
HSUPA
Coverage
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
416
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
417
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Operation
Description
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
418
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Predicting slow
fading by using the
shadow fading
margin
Calculating the
CPICH RSCP to
determine the
primary serving cell
Calculating the
power of interference
noise to determine
the handover area.
Calculating counters
of traffic channels
and common
channels based on the
Bin points
Displaying
prediction results
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 6-17 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
419
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Antenna fading of a
terminal
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
Penetration loss
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
420
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Calculate forcibly
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
Click
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
421
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Context
l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
422
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Perform the following operations as required.
If ...
Then ...
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Prerequisites
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
423
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction
Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of
parameters, see 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
Step 8 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
424
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group.
1.
2.
3.
2.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
425
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
3.
4.
5.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Procedure
l
Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.
426
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
3.
4.
5.
Click Export.
Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to
single-mode networks.
You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a
Bin point within the range.
1.
2.
Then...
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > CPICH RSCP from the shortcut menu.
When you do not select the CPICH RSRP indicator when performing prediction
calculation, you cannot export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power.
The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage
area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the
cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.
The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified
range.
5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click Export.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
427
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable
only to single-mode networks.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box
as shown in Figure 6-11 is displayed.
4.
Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N
records to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
6.
After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.
NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include CPICH RSCP
when you creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-12.
l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of
TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-13. This value
specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
428
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
429
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.
The exported contents mainly include:
l
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
430
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or
created.
Context
The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.
Context
For detailed operations of exporting the feature database, see Export the top N records of the
reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by
Bin Point.
431
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
l
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
432
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Context
On a new network, neighboring cell relationships do not exist. All neighboring cells are planned
initially. The initial planning of neighboring cells includes intra-frequency neighboring cell
planning, inter-frequency neighboring cell planning, and inter-RAT neighboring cell planning.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-14.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
433
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters for
Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
NOTE
You can right-click UMTS and choose Stop Neighbor Allocation from the shortcut menu to stop the
current neighboring cell planning.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For details, see 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning
Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 6.13.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
After the neighboring cell planning is complete, You can check and optimize neighboring cell
configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell
Configuration.
434
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created or imported, including network information before
the expansion and added site information after the expansion.
Procedure
Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the network before the expansion.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
4.
5.
l Select and import neighboring cell relationship files containing neighboring cell relationships
that are in the Added and No Change status.
l The values of CellName and NeighborCellName need to be the same as the names of cells and
neighboring cells on NEs respectively. The names of intra-RAT cells on NEs must be unique.
6.
Click OK.
2.
3.
Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-15.
Figure 6-15 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters
for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
435
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6
Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
----End
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been imported or created and the Cell Table files of 2G
network and 3G network have been imported respectively.
Context
The coverage area of 3G network is the same as that of the 2G network and the addresses of
sites on the 3G network are the same as those on the 2G network. Therefore, neighboring cells
on the 2G network are inherited on the 3G network. For the expansion of a 3G network, see
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.
Procedure
Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the 2G network.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
4.
5.
Click OK.
2.
3.
Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-16.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
436
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters
for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
5.
Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6
Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
----End
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the
map window, as shown in Figure 6-17.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
437
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
438
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
439
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
1. In the Cell area of the main window, rightclick the table and choose Statistic from
the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed
dialog box. For details, see Parameters
for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering
Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The neighboring cell
relationship check report is exported to an
XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets,
and each sheet shows the result that meets
certain audit conditions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
440
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
441
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
442
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE
You can create neighboring cell planning scripts based on the result of neighboring cell planning. The UNet is applicable to the planning of intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells under different
RNCs. If inter-RNC neighboring cells are involved in the planning, type the RNC ID of each cell in the
RNCID column in the table in the Cell area.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
443
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
444
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The planning and optimization of UMTS scrambling codes are applicable to the following
scenarios. Figure 6-22 shows the operation procedure.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
445
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-22 Operation procedure for scenario-based scrambling code planning and optimization
Context
On the UMTS network, the U-Net supports the allocation of scrambling codes based on tier
reuse, distance reuse, and maximum-usage or average allocation principles. The U-Net also
provides multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping, vertical grouping, and
customized grouping. Users can use the U-Net to allocate scrambling code groups based on cell
types.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
446
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l Scrambling code planning based on tier reuse is available after neighboring cell planning is complete.
l Maximum-usage allocation maximizes the reuse of scrambling code resources to increase the usage of
scrambling codes.
l Average allocation ensures that all scrambling codes are equally used.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Check the allocation of scrambling codes in the existing cells.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is
displayed.View the scrambling codes of existing cells.
Step 4 Set scrambling code resource in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters
for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.
Step 7 Choose Automatic Identify High-Site from the shortcut menu.
Step 8 After the Height of High-Site is set, click Identify.
The U-Net automatically selects the cells that meet the height requirement from the Normal
cells and High_Site cells. The Scene of selected cells is set to High_Site, and the Scene of the
other cells is set to Normal. Cells in the two scenarios are displayed in the Cell area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
447
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can right-click UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and choose Stop Scrambling Codes Planning
from the shortcut menu to stop the current scrambling code planning.
----End
Prerequisites
UMTS scrambling codes have been planned.
Context
The scrambling code plan changes frequently on the live network due to causes such as network
expansion. Therefore, the distribution of the current scrambling codes needs to be checked
periodically to ensure that scrambling codes are properly distributed. The scrambling code
planning is a process of checking whether scrambling codes are reused based on preset reuse
tier and distance. The requirements of reuse tier and distance vary based on scenarios. Suburbs
and rural areas require more reuse tiers and longer reuse distance.
Procedure
Step 1 If the Scrambling Code Display window has been opened, go to Step 5. Otherwise, proceed
to Step 2.
Step 2 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
448
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Perform the following operations as required.
If you need to...
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
449
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
450
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Main ARFCN
Use Times
451
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Cell Type
----End
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
452
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report.
Step 3 Right-click UMTS Measure Report and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 New
Step 4 In the displayed UMTS Measure Report dialog box, select a computation area and set the data
source for measurement report analysis. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.10
Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.
Step 5 Click OK to create a new measurement report analysis group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate
the measurement report analysis group.
Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop
calculating the measurement report analysis group.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
453
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report > existing measurement report analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing measurement report analysis group and choose New from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26 New
Step 4 In the displayed Measure Report Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as
shown in Figure 6-27. For details about these counters, see 6.13.11 Parameters for
Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
454
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
After measurement report analysis counters are created, the live network data analysis results of the counters
are geographically displayed in the map window.
----End
The U-Net supports only UMTS network capacity expansion by splitting sectors.
Figure 6-28 shows the flow chart for analyzing network capacity expansion through the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
455
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 Choose UMTS Network Expansion from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click UMTS Network Expansion and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-29.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
456
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 In the displayed Network Expansion Analysis dialog box, select a computation area, set a data
source and policy for expansion analysis, and set algorithm parameters for soft handovers and
MR-based traffic evaluation. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.12 Parameters for
Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.
Step 5 Click OK or Apply to create a network capacity expansion analysis group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate
the capacity expansion analysis group.
Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop
calculating the capacity expansion analysis group.
NOTE
l
l The time required for the calculation depends on the selected MR data size, computation area, and the
selected expansion policy. The required calculation time is directly proportional to the MR data size,
computation area, and expansion policy complexity.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
457
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as
shown in Figure 6-30.
Figure 6-30 New
Step 4 In the displayed Expansion Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown
in Figure 6-31. For details about these counters, see 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically
Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
458
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE
You can check Initial, Final, and Variation analysis results for each counter.
After the analysis items are created, the expansion analysis results of the counters are geographically
displayed in the map window.
----End
459
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose Result from the shortcut menu, as
shown in Figure 6-32.
Figure 6-32 Result
Step 4 In the displayed Result dialog box, check the network capacity expansion results. For details
about these parameters, see 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion
Results.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
460
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Group Name
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Resolution(m)
Polygon
With Shadow
Indoor Coverage
DLFrequencyBand
ARFCN
461
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Signal Level(dBm)
Terminal
Service
Mobility
Description
DLDivGain
MacroDivGain
MaxSpatialMultiplexingFactor
MinCPICHEcIo
OrthoFactor
PilotEcIoMargin
PilotPollutionMargin
SHOThreshold
SpatialMultiplexingFactor
TopNSignalLevel
ULDivGain
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
462
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Methods Select
Co-Site Distance(m)
Azimuth Difference ()
Planning Weight
Resolution(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
463
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Compute Shadowing
Handover Threshold(dB)
Area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
464
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Force Symmetry
Description
Inter-Frequency Config
Table 6-25 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring
cell planning)
Parameter
Description
SourceNetType
Indicates the network system that the source cell belongs to.
To
Handover Threshold(dB)
Max Number
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
465
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Display Links
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Legend
Description
Intra Frequency
Inter Frequency
Inter-RAT
Intra Technology
Paired Inter-RAT
Add To Legend
Transparency
466
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 6-28 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
Percentage of Reference
Neighbors
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
None
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
467
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Table 6-30 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause
Confirm
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
468
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Customize
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Type
469
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Reuse Rule
Allocate Rule
Main ARFCN
Consecutive Allocate
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
470
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Existing Code
Suggest Code
Confirm Code
Use Times
471
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
None
No Allocation Cells
Indicates the cells that use the same scrambling code group
as the adjacent sites. A UARFCN must be specified.
ARFCN
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
Name
472
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
UARFCN(UL)
UARFCN(DL)
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(UL)s.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(DL)s.
ACIR
Adjacent channel
interference ratio.
Unit: dB.
Value range: real number that
is greater than 0.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Name
Name of a MR analysis
group.
473
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Polygon
Computation area.
l If there is no computation
area, you can create a polygon
through
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Path
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1st.Data Row
Longitude
Longitude.
Latitude
Latitude.
RNC ID
Cell ID
ID of a cell.
Cell MR Count
474
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Description
RSCP analysis
EcIo analysis
475
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Remarks
Name
Name of a capacity
expansion analysis
item.
Computation Area
Computation area.
Description
Remarks
Measure Report
Path
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Add Sector
Site Name
Name of a site.
Transceiver
Name of a transceiver.
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
CI
Antenna
Antenna of a cell.
476
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Cell Comments
Description
Remarks
Minimum RSCP
threshold.
RSCP Margin(dB)
RSCP margin.
The default value is 6 dB.
ActiveSet Size
Measure Report
Duration(s)
Cell MR Percent
Threshold
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
477
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Select a column to be
imported and save it as a
configuration file. Next time
when you import the MR file,
you only need to directly
import the configuration file.
This parameter is set based
on site requirements.
1st.Data Row
Longitude
Longitude.
Latitude
Latitude.
RNC ID
Cell ID
ID of a cell.
Cell MR Count
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
478
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
RSCP
EcIo
RSSI
Best Server
Pilot Pollution
Handover Area
Description
Site Name
Name of a site.
CS Traffic Variation
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
479
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Splitted
CS Traffic Variation
Transceiver Name
CS Traffic(Erlang)
Description
Status
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
CS Traffic(Erlang)
SHO Ratio
SHO Overhead
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Cell ID
ID of a source cell.
RNC ID
480
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Dest CellName
Dest CellID
Dest RNCID
SHO Ratio
481
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
482
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network.
You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for
each cell one by one.
7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning
The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the
spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code
planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.
7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the
U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
483
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data
484
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
No.
Procedure
Description
Managing
propagation models
and bands
Adding a device
Setting NE
parameters
Planning PN codes/
Planning
neighboring cells
Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
485
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
486
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
487
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l
Select Template Management from the base station template drop-down list on the
toolbar and open the Station Template Properties dialog box.
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
For example,
2.
Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting
CDMA Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
2.
3.
View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
488
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
489
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 On the CDMACell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the CDMA cell.
For parameter description, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Description
Name
Support Type
Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Comments
Description.
Model
Site Equipment
490
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
Description
Frequency Band
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Active
Frequency Band
Channel Index
MSC ID
BSC ID
BTS ID
Cell ID
Sector ID
PN
491
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
N*PN INC
PN GROUP
Scene
Neighbors list
Comment
Remarks.
Description
Name
Site
Hexagon Radius(m)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
492
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Antenna ID
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)
Dy(m)
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Azimuth
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID
Equipment
Equipment properties.
For details, see Table 7-5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
493
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Site Equipment
TMA
Feeder
to
Feeder Length(m)
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
Total Loss(dB)
494
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
l
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
495
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
496
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,
see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
497
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 7-3.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 7-4.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
the shortcut menu..
After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the
original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
498
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export
mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
499
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
500
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
501
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
PN group data has been obtained from customer representatives.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Open PN Group from the shortcut menu. The PN Group dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Right-click in the dialog box, and choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Select a PN group file and import it to the U-Net.
Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2.
Step 7 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, set planned PN code parameters. For details about the parameters,
see 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.
Step 9 Click Run.
After PN codes are planned, the PN Display dialog box is displayed. For details about the
parameters, see 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
2.
On the map, select a sector or click the head of a row in the planning result table.
The system displays the sectors having the same PN code as the selected sector.
Prerequisites
PN code planning is complete.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
502
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
2.
3.
Right-click and choose Open PN Table from the shortcut menu. The PN Display
dialog box is displayed.
4.
In the dialog box, right-click and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. The Audit
Form dialog box is displayed.
5.
Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-6. The U-Net allows you to select
multiple check criteria at a time.
Table 7-6 Conditions for checking PN codes
Parameter
Description
Data Source
6.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Min Distance
Min Layer
Min Score
Distance Scope
(km)
Layer Scope
Score Scope
Neighbour sectors
used the same PN
code
2.
3.
Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Check from the shortcut menu. The
1Way-2Way Check dialog box is displayed.
4.
503
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
l
Parameter
Description
ARFCN
Check 1-way
Problem
Check 2-way
Problem
Base on Existed
Neighbor and PN
Base on Planned
Neighbor and PN
Click OK to export a check report. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.8
Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results.
2.
3.
Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Open from the shortcut menu.
4.
On the One way result or Two way result tab page of the displayed Check Result
dialog box, right-click and choose Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation from the
shortcut menu. The Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation dialog box is displayed.
5.
6.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Click OK.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
504
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, filtered 1way-2way redundant neighbor
relationships are displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, right-click an item and you can delete the
corresponding data item.
Prerequisites
PN code planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click PN Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut
menu. See Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Display Option
Step 3 In the displayed Display Options dialog box, set the parameters for setting the display properties
of PN codes. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display
Properties of PN Codes.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
505
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Delete Existed PN
Rhombus AngleA:
Rhombus AngleB:
Rhombus AngleC:
Rhombus AngleD:
POI
PM
MaxDistance
Area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
506
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
MSC_BSC_BTS_Sector
Indicates the combination of the MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
and sector ID.
Existed PNG
Existed PN
Suggest PNG
Suggest PN
Sector Name
Scene
Indicates a scenario.
Score
Distance
Layer
Co-Sector
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Suggest
Existed
PN INC
Same PN
Neighborhood PN
507
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Indoor
Outdoor
Special
Add To Legend
Transparency
Description
Indoor
Outdoor
Special
Add To Legend
Transparency
Description
Methods Select
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
508
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Area
Description
Force Symmetry
Main Frequency
Base on Topology
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
509
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
Display Links
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Legend
Description
Intra Frequency
Inter Frequency
Inter-RAT
Intra Technology
Paired Inter-RAT
510
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Legend
Description
Add To Legend
Transparency
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 7-16 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
Percentage of Reference
Neighbors
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
None
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
511
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Table 7-18 Parameter description
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause
Confirm
512
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Description
PN
SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC
DistanceAB
DistanceBC
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
PN
SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC<->SectorD
DistanceAB
DistanceBC
DistanceCD
513
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
514
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
515
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
516
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data
Managing
propagation models
and bands
Adding a device
Setting traffic
parameters
Setting NE
parameters
Planning
neighboring cells
Predicting network
performance
10
Exporting network
planning results
517
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,
UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2 Project Templates
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
518
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.
Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
519
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For
details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see
3.6.6 Setting User Types.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
520
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Meaning
Name
Type
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Activity
Max Throughput(kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
521
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Min Throughput(kbit/s)
Average Throughput(kbit/s)
Transmission Efficiency
Select Service
----End
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
522
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
RAT.
type
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters of the new terminal type.
l For GSM networks, see Parameters for setting GSM terminal
types.
l For UMTS networks, seeParameters for setting UMTS terminal
types.
l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for setting LTE-FDD
terminal types.
l UnionTerminal: For example, if a multi-mode terminal supports
both GSM and UMTS, set GSM and UMTS in Select Terminal.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
Modify an
existing terminal
Network system > An existing terminal type.
type
2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify parameters of the existing terminal type.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
523
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
Procedure
l
2.
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
524
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Such as
l
2.
3.
l
Click OK.
2.
3.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
525
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set properties of cells on the Network system tab page.
l For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells.
l For details about setting the properties of a GSM cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of GSM Cells.
l For details about setting the properties of a UMTS cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of UMTS Cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
526
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by
learning the basic knowledge.
CoverageBySignelLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal chip power is greater than
the sensitivity of the receiver) of a cell.
CoverageByCirLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal CIR is greater than the
specified threshold) of a cell.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
527
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 8-3 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Table 8-3 Meanings of factors in the formulas
Factor
Meaning
Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Antenna fading of a
terminal
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
528
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Factor
Meaning
Penetration loss
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
Prerequisites
l
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l
Calculation
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
529
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Calculate
Calculate forcibly
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
Click
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
530
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction
Counters and Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of
parameters, see 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
531
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
Procedure
l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group.
1.
2.
3.
2.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
532
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
533
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Select the objects to be exported.
If you need to...
Then...
Step 3 Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.
The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points in the selected area.
Step 5 Click Export.
----End
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
534
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Meaning
Group Name
Prediction Type
Study Selected
Calculate Now
Meaning
Name
Resolution(m)
Polygon
Technology
With Shadow
Indoor Coverage
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Meaning
CIRGate(dB)
Sensitivity(dBm)
535
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Terminal
Service
Meaning
CIRGate(dB)
Sensitivity(dBm)
Terminal
Service
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
536
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
l
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
537
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Context
l
The U-Net performs automatic neighboring cell planning on a per RAT basis. For example,
in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, automatic neighboring cell planning must be
performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network.
This section describes the neighboring cell planning on a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multimode network.
Procedure
Step 1 For neighboring cell planning of a GSM network, see 5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring
Cells.
Step 2 For neighboring cell planning of a UMTS network, see 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning
for a New Network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
538
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 For neighboring cell planning of an LTE-FDD network, see Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring
Cells.
----End
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
Then...
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 8-7.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
shown in Figure 8-8.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
539
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
the shortcut menu..
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
shortcut menu..
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
540
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Then...
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
541
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
542
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Table 8-8 Parameter description
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
543
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Cause
Confirm
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
544
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
FAQ
545
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView
function.
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project
to Display Properly
This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating
a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating
a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after
the printer is disconnected from the network.
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System
This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when
the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the
following information if the preceding problem occurs.
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure
This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged
or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can
refer to this section when a project fails to be created.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
546
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Question
How do I select the required software before installing the U-Net?
Answer
The software to be installed in advance varies according to the U-Net version. Select the software
to be installed based on the U-Net version.
If...
Then...
----End
Question
How to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages at Huawei support website?
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
547
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Answer
Step 1 View the four GENEX U-Net software installation packages at http://support.huawei.com, as
shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 GENEX U-Net V300R008C00
l Huawei.UNet32(exclude framework)
Supports 32-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet64
Supports 64-bit operating system, including the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet64(exclude framework)
Supports 64-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet32
Supports 32-bit operating system, including the .net framework.
NOTE
Step 2 Check whether the .net framework is installed in Add/Remove Programs and select installation
packages based on the actual situation.
If...
Then...
----End
548
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Question
How to check field matching in the Field Mapping area?
Answer
Step 1 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Source row, as shown in
Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Field Mapping area
l The Source row displays the column fields of the file to be imported.
l If the Source row cannot display field names correctly, you need to modify the file to be
imported.
l The U-Net has requirements on the format of the file to be imported. Therefore, it is
recommended that you export the existing data in the system to a file, which is used as a
template. After that, you modify data based on the template and then import the file to the
U-Net.
Step 2 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Destination row.
If...
Then...
Display IGNORE.
NOTE
l Among the fields in the system, there are one or more fields that must
be matched. These fields must match those in the file to be imported.
Otherwise, you cannot click Import or the system prompts an error
message when you click Import.
l For example, when you import a site file, Site Name is a field that must
be matched.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
549
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Question
When data is being imported into or exported from an XLS file, a dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-3. How can I solve the problem? The following takes exporting neighboring
cell relationships for example.
Figure 9-3 Export neighbor relation
Answer
Set regional language of the operating system to be the same as the language of the current
version of Microsoft Office 2007 by referring to workaround measures provided by the
Microsoft.
If the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 is English, set regional language
of the operating system to English (United States) on the Regional Options tab page, as shown
in Figure 9-4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
550
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
----End
Question
How to solve the problem if a map fails to be imported and displayed in an English Windows 7
operating system because the directory of the map contains Chinese characters?
Answer
Step 1 Choose Control Panel > Region and Language > Administrative, as shown in Figure 9-5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
551
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
552
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Question
How do I solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to
load the Google Earth, garbled images, abnormal display during remote connection attempts,
and other abnormal display events?
Answer
Step 1 Ensure that the Google Earth client in 6.0.3.2197 or later is installed.
Step 2 You are advised to select DirectX in the Graphics Mode area, as shown in Figure 9-7.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
553
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
----End
Question
The progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new
project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. How can I solve the
problem?
Answer
If you set a remote printer as a default printer, the access to a local printer takes a long period
of time or fails. In this case, the system runs slowly or the progress bar for creating a project
remains unchanged when you obtain printer parameters to create a project.
Set a local printer that is accessible as the default printer or delete all printers.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
554
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Question
How to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to
draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system?
Answer
The MSVCR71.DLL system library file needs to be invoked when you are using the U-Net to
draw a graph. This system library file is delivered with all Windows operating systems by default
except the Windows XP 64-bit operating system.
In a Windows XP 32-bit operating system, search the MSVCR71.DLL system library file in
the System32 directory. Then copy the file to the SysWOW64 directory in the Windows XP
64-bit operating system.
----End
Question
How do I solve the problem when a project fails to be created and the dialog box in Figure
9-8 is displayed?
Figure 9-8 Creating project failed
Answer
Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
555
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
556
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
10
557
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
558
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
559
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
Click
2.
l You can scroll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom in on or zoom out on the
map.
l Alternatively, you can right-click in the map window and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out
to zoom in on or zoom out on the map.
Click
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose
Define a Zoom Area from the shortcut menu.
2.
3.
Hold and drag the mouse pointer to the diagonal corner of the area.
Release the mouse button. Then, the selected area is magnified.
Select a scaling.
on the toolbar.
1.
Click
2.
Move a map.
1.
Click
2.
Move the mouse pointer to the map and drag the map to the required direction.
on the toolbar.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
on the toolbar.
560
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
To enable the map to center on an object in the map window, right-click an object in
the Explorer window and choose Center in The Map from the shortcut menu.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Distance
Measurement from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click a point on the map and use it as the starting point for measuring the distance.
Then, the starting point is fixed. When the pointer moves away from the starting point, a red
dotted line appears between the pointer and the starting point. The distance between the pointer
and the starting point is displayed in the status bar in real time.
Step 3 Click another point on the map and use it as the second point for measuring the distance.
Then, the red dotted line between the starting point and the second line becomes a red continuous
line.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to add several points to form a folding line.
Then, the following information is displayed in the status bar:
Distance: Distance between the second-to-last point and the last point/Distance between the first
point and the last point
Step 5 Double-click the line or right-click in the map window to complete the distance measurement.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Click
561
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Click in another place in the map window to determine the end point of the terrain analysis line.
After the end point is determined, a continuous line appears between the two points.
The terrain profile of the two points is displayed in the Terrain View window.
NOTE
l The system allows you to draw only one terrain analysis line.
l After a terrain analysis line is drawn, click in any place in the map window. The original terrain analysis
line disappears and the system begins to draw a new terrain analysis line.
Step 4 As shown in Figure 10-1, set the following parameters in the Terrain View window:
l Transceiver height: Indicates the height of a transmitter.
l Receiver height: Indicates the height of a receiver.
l Show building: Indicates whether to show the buildings.
l Frequency: Indicates the frequency of a transmitter.
After the parameters are set, the Terrain View window will automatically update and display
the terrain profile.
Figure 10-1 Terrain View window
----End
Context
You can select legend objects for display based on the service analysis requirement. For example,
during the prediction, the map displays multiple prediction results and you may find it difficult
to query the required prediction result. In this case, you can select or clear a legend object to
display or hide certain prediction results. Therefore, you can focus on the key services. Then,
only the selected legend object is displayed in the legend window.
This section describes how to query the legend information about the prediction results. The
procedure for querying other legend information is similar to the procedure for querying the
legend information about the prediction results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
562
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Select a legend object.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
4.
5.
In the last column of the object list, select legend objects as required.
NOTE
If the default legend objects cannot meet your analysis requirements, you can define new
objects. For example, to add a new legend object before an existing legend object, you can
select the existing legend object and choose Actions > Insert Before; then, the system
creates the new legend object automatically.
6.
Select Add to legend. The legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.
7.
Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the
Legend window.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 1 Click
You must set a coordinate system. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.3.7 Configuring
the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
563
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 2 Select the object to be displayed on the Google Earth. For detailed description of parameters,
see 10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.
Step 3 Click View to connect the U-Net to the Google Earth.
Step 4 Optional: Click Save to save the selected U-Net data to a .kmz file.
By default, the .kmz file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the file name is
UNet_Generated.kmz. You can also click
to reset the path to save the file and the file name.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can query objects displayed in threedimensional mode on the Google Earth. See Figure 10-2.
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can select or clear the objects
described in Step 2 in the navigation tree in the Explorer window of the U-Net. In this way,
the objects can be displayed or hidden on the Google Earth.
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can modify the objects described in
Step 2, such as creating or deleting a prediction group or a polygon. Upon completion of
the modification, perform Step 1 to Step 4 again to refresh the display status of the Google
Earth.
564
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is
accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so
that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Context
A map consists of a series of layers. The top layer can be clearly viewed in the map. It can also
be clearly viewed after the map is printed. The visibility of the bottom layer depends on the
definition and transparency of the upper layers.
On the U-Net, the display sequence of the layers is determined by the sequence of the nodes
under the Map node on the Geo tab page in the Explorer window. You can adjust the sequence
of each node under the Map node to adjust the display sequence of each layer.
You can use the U-Net to adjust the display sequence of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text,
Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights and the display sequence of the sublayers of these
layers. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of the prediction counters in the map
window.
Procedure
l
The hidden object in the map window is still taken into account during calculation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Adjust Map from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Map dialog box is
displayed.. See Figure 10-3.
565
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
Select the layer to be adjusted from the Map Layer drop-down list.
If only one layer is selected after the layer is selected, its geodetic coordinates at the
northern boundary are displayed in the Top of Layer field and its geodetic coordinates
at the western boundary is displayed in the Left of Layer field. The vertical offset of
the layer is displayed in the Y Offset text box and the horizontal offset of the layer is
displayed in the X Offset text box. If two or more layers are selected or no layer is
selected, no value is displayed for Top of Layer, Left of Layer, Y Offset, and X
Offset.
NOTE
For the offset of the layers Geometry, Text, and Vector, The values of Top of Layer and Left
of Layer are not displayed. For the offset of the layers Satellitic, Buildings, Clutter, and
Heights, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer indicate the geodetic coordinates of
corresponding layers.
5.
Type the layer offset in the text box in the middle and set the offset direction by clicking
Up, Down, Left, or Right.
The offset of a layer ranges from 10 meters to 10,000 meters.
6.
On the Geo tab page of the Explorer window, select the nodes corresponding to the
target layer objects under the Map node.
The layer objects include the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings,
Clutter, and Heights.
2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
566
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The horizontal black line indicates the position where the object is to be placed when
you release the mouse. After you drag the object, the U-Net automatically refreshes
the display effect of the map based on the adjusted sequence.
----End
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the objects to be exported.
If you need to...
Then...
Export
1. Under the Geo tab in the Explorer window, select the layers to be
overlapped layers
exported under the Map node.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Export a single
layer
Step 2 Choose Save As from the shortcut menu. The Export Map Layer dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the area for export.
l Full Map: exports the entire map.
l A polygon: exports the external rectangular area of a polygon.
Step 4 Set the resolution for export.
l Origin Map Scale: exports images according to the original resolution of the geographic
data.
l Current Map Scale: exports images according to the display resolution of the geographic
data in the map window.
Step 5 Set the save path, file name, and file format of the exported file.
TIP
The higher the resolution is, the larger the map size is. Before exporting a map, ensure that the save path
has sufficient free disk space.
567
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
Then...
Click
Click the column name to select it. Then, click the column
name again, hold the left mouse button, and drag the
column to the required position when the mouse arrow
changes to
If a shortcut menu item in a table window grays out, it indicates that the function is not supported in the
table window or the function is currently unavailable.
Description
Import
Export
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Exports the data of all the available columns in a table. The file
exported is in the .txt, .csv, or .xls format.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
568
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Name
Description
Record Properties
Table Fields
Opens the window for customizing table fields. The window is used
for setting customized fields and supports the Site, Transceiver, and
Cell tables.
You can click Add, Delete, or Properties to add, delete, or modify
a customized field. For parameter description, see 10.17.2
Parameters for Setting Custom Fields.
Display Columns
Hide Columns
Freeze Columns
Unfreeze all
Columns
Copy
Paste
Pastes data.
Delete
Filter by Selection
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
569
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Name
Description
Filter Excluding
Selection
Remove Filter
Sort Ascending
Sort Descending
NOTE
The system saves the current table settings while saving the project, for example, display order of
columns, row height, and column width.
----End
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
570
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Double-click the title bar of the docked window. The docked window moves away from
the dock area and floats over the workspace. If you double-click the title bar again, the
docked window returns to the previous dock area.
You can move a docked window by clicking or moving the title bar.
----End
Context
The Explorer window provides the following sections:
l
GEO (
Data (
Network (
Operation (
For details about each section, see 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net. This section describes only
the basic operations of the Explorer window.
Procedure
l
Display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node
in the navigation tree of the Explorer window.
You can display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding
node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can deselect the node
corresponding to an object to hide this object on the map. In this way, another object can
be clearly displayed on the map. For example, you can hide all the prediction results except
one prediction result. In this way, the reserved prediction result can be clearly displayed.
The following description takes the hiding of one object as an example to explain this
operation. Click a tab in the Explorer window and then deselect an object under the tab.
The deselected object is hidden and will not be displayed in the map window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
571
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l The hidden object is not displayed in the map window, but is still considered during calculation.
l You can hide all the contents under a node by deselecting the node name. If the check box next to a
node is displayed as , it indicates that certain objects are displayed and certain objects are hidden
under this node.
----End
Context
The method for setting the display style of the Site is similar to that of the Transceiver. This
section takes setting the display style of the Transceiver as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the display style. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.4 Parameters for Setting
NE Display Properties.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
All the NEs in the project are displayed in the map window according to the preset display style.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
On the toolbar, choose Edit > Find. Then, select an NE type from the Find drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 10-4.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
572
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
Type the NE name in the Name text box, as shown in Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5 Name
3.
Click Enter.
The U-Net automatically locates the NE in the map window.
2.
3.
Choose Find from the shortcut menu. The Find Transceiver dialog box is displayed.
4.
5.
Click Find.
The search result is displayed in the Result area and the statistical result is displayed
in the lower part of the dialog box.
6.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Delete a transceiver.
Select the transceiver to be deleted in the Result area and click Delete.
573
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Select a grouping mode.
If...
Then...
The predefined
grouping modes
meet your
requirements
Go to Step 3.
The predefined
grouping modes do
not meet your
requirements
2.
3.
4.
Right-click the table and choose Table Fields from the shortcut menu. The Transceiver
Table Fields dialog box is displayed.
5.
6.
7.
574
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 5 Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu.
The system automatically groups cells or sites based on the selected grouping mode.
Step 6 Customize the grouping modes to be displayed.
1.
2.
3.
Right-click Site or Transceiver and choose Group By > More from the shortcut menu.
The GroupBy Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6. The following
takes the Site node for example.
Figure 10-6 GroupBy Config dialog box
4.
In the GroupBy Config dialog box, select the customized grouping mode that needs to be
displayed when you choose Group By from the shortcut menu.
5.
Click OK.
NOTE
You can right-click Site and choose Group By > Grouping Mode to set secondary grouping modes.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
575
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
After the grouping is complete, view the grouping result.
Site groups are displayed based the grouping mode under the Site node in the navigation tree.
Prerequisites
The value of Hexagon Radius for the transmitter is not empty during site deployment or
engineering parameter import.
Procedure
on the toolbar. The cell cellular grid is displayed in the map window, as shown in
Step 1 Click
Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 Show Cell Hexagon
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
576
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l After the transmitter location is changed, the cellular grid also moves to the new location.
l After the transmitter is deactivated or deleted, the cellular grid of the transmitter disappears.
Step 2 Click
NOTE
The Hexagon Radius(m) attribute of the transmitter determines the size of the hexagon cellular grid. After
the value of Hexagon Radius(m) is changed, the size of the hexagon cellular grid on the map is also
changed.
----End
Points (vector)
For the methods of selecting display objects and setting the display sequence, see 10.6 Setting Layer Display
Properties. For the methods of setting the color, transparency, and shading effect, see 3.3.5 Setting Display
Parameters of Geographic Data.
Context
Before printing a map, you can set print properties and preview the print effect.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
577
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Print layout involves setting the scaling, selecting the ruler, legend, and area, adding a title
or mark, and setting the size, source, orientation, and margin of the paper.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the print layout.
1.
Choose File > Print Setting. The Print Setting dialog box is displayed.
2.
3.
4.
Step 2 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Printer to set the printer, print area, and the number of
copies to print.
You can select a PDF printer to print the map as a .pdf file.
Step 3 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Print or choose File > Print to print.
The U-Net supports printing a map into several pages. When the size of the map exceeds the
paper size, the system automatically prints it into several pages.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Print Setting. The PrintSetting dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Add to create a print template.
The system automatically creates a print template with the default setting in the Print
Template area.
Step 3 Modify the properties of the new print template.
For details, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties.
Step 4 Optional: Click Export to export the parameters of the selected template into a .cfg
configuration file for future use.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
578
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
2.
Select the configuration file (in .cfg format) of the print template.
3.
Click Open.
NOTE
If the name of the print template to be imported is the same as that of an existing template, the system
displays a prompt asking you whether to overwrite the existing template.
Prerequisites
l
Currently, the U-Net supports only the DT data in .txt, .xls and .csv files exported by using
the GENEX Probe.
For CDMA networks, the U-Net does not support the functions such as importing and
filtering DT data.
This section describes how to import CW Measurement data. The method of importing
Drive Test data is similar to that of importing CW Measurement data.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file format and the file to be imported.
Step 5 Click Open. The Import File dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Set import parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
579
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l Import Drive Test data. For parameter description, see 10.17.7 Parameters for Importing
Drive Test Data.
l Import CW data. For parameter description, see 10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW
Measurement Data.
Step 7 Click Import to start importing DT data.
l In the process of data importing, the system displays prompts in the Event Viewer window.
In this case, pay attention to the prompts.
l After the data import is complete, the DT data file is displayed under the CW
Measurement > Sitex_x node on the navigation tree.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Delete a DT file.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose
Delete from the shortcut menu.
Prerequisites
l
This section describes how to filter CW Measurement data. The method of filtering Drive
Test data is similar to that of filtering CW Measurement data.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
580
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Choose Filter from the shortcut menu. The Filter dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set filtering conditions.
NOTE
l Distance area, set the maximum and minimum distance between DT points and the cell.
If the distance between a DT point and the cell is within the range of [maximum, minimum],
the DT point is not filtered out.
l Measurement area, set the maximum and minimum receive level of DT points.
If the receive level of a DT point is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT point
is not filtered out.
l Azimuth area, set the azimuth of the sector. The azimuth is the angle between the DT point
and the north direction of the map.
You can set multiple filtering conditions related to the azimuth. In the Azimuth List list, the
data within the range of [Start,End] is not filtered out.
l In the Clutter area, select a clutter class.
The DT points related to the selected clutter class is not filtered out.
Select All: Select clutter types in batches.
Select None: Clear clutter types in batches.
For details about the parameters, see 10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data.
Step 5 Determine whether to select Delete Outside Points.
If you select this option, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filtered
out; if you do not select this option, the system just hides the information about the DT points
that are filtered out in the filtering results.
Step 6 Click OK to filter the DT data.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the filtering, you can view the filtering results.
1.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2.
3.
Prerequisites
1.
2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
581
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 On the displayed Data tab page, choose Drive Test > DT data file in the navigation tree.
NOTE
The U-Net can filter DT data that is exported to a file in .txt, .xls, or .csv format using the GENEX Probe.
Step 3 Right-click the selected DT file and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The DT data
window is displayed.
Step 4 You can perform the following operations as required.
If...
Then...
NOTE
You can right-click in the DT data window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu to remove
the filter effect.
----End
Prerequisites
The CW Measurement data is imported.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
582
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The purpose of propagation model calibration is to optimize the coefficients of a propagation
model by using the actual CW measurement data. The current U-Net supports propagation
calibration based on the CW measurement data only.
The common counters for analyzing the calibration results are as follows:
l
Standard deviation: Mean square of the difference between the prediction error and the
average error.
Correlation coefficient: indicates the correlation between the actual CW measurement data
and the data calculated by the propagation model.
Prediction error indicates the error between the CW measurement data and the data calculated
by the propagation model.
If the standard deviation and average error of the calibration result are small, it indicates that the
calibrated propagation model matches the actual environment.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement.
Step 3 Choose Automatically Calibrate from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Form dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Select the propagation model to be calibrated in Select Propagation Model.
Step 5 Select the CW file for propagation model calibration in Select Measurement File.
Step 6 Set the parameters for calibrating the propagation model in Calibrate Limitation.
l Selecting (clearing)Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the impact of the clutter factor is
considered.
If this option is selected, the loss of each clutter class is calibrated.
l Set the standard deviation in Standard Deviation. The default value is 8 dB.
Usually, the value of this parameter is set to 8 dB in the case of flat areas and to 11 dB in the
case of hilly areas.
l Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability. The default value
is 75%.
Step 7 Select the coefficients of the propagation model to be calibrated.
You can calibrate the coefficients of the propagation model one by one until you obtain the
desired propagation model. Alternatively, you can also calibrate all the coefficients at a time.
Step 8 Click Calibrate to start the calibration.
After the calibration, the Result window is displayed.
Step 9 Query the calibration results.
For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration
Results of Propagation Models.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
583
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
----End
Prerequisites
The CW measurement or Drive Test data has been imported.
NOTE
If you need to check the calibration effect of the propagation model, the following prerequisites must be met:
l
Context
This section uses the CW measurement data as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
Step 3 Choose Calculate Signal Levels from the shortcut menu.
Note the messages displayed in the Event Viewer window.
Step 4 After the calculation is completed, In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement >
Sitex_x > drive test file.
Step 5 Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
l The table lists the actual signal strength at each drive test point, signal strength at each drive
test point calculated by the calibrated propagation model, and the difference between the two
values.
l For details about the parameters in the table, see 10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point
Information.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
584
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2.
----End
Description
Value
Sites
By default, this
option is selected.
Export Sites
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Transceiver Radius
Polygons
By default, this
option is selected.
Predictions
By default, this
option is selected.
Transparency
585
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Simulation Users
By default, this
option is selected.
Drive Test
By default, this
option is selected.
CW Measurement
By default, this
option is selected.
Description
Group
Legend
Type
Size
If Text is selected as the data type, the Size box is available, where you
can set the text length.
The value range is from 1 to 300.
If you select other data types, the Size box is unavailable.
Default Value
Choice List
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
586
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Filter
Area
First row of
parameters
Second row of
parameters
Condition
Result
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Available Fields
587
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Selected Fields
Description
Display Type
Field
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
588
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
For example,
Actions
Description
Color
Selected Color
Size
Symbol
Example
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Color
Font
Size
Style
589
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Example
Description
Configuration File
Header
Field Separator
Available Fields
Exported Fields
Preview
Description
Configuration File
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
590
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this
row and the subsequent rows is imported.
Field Separator
Update Records
Field
Mappin
g
Source
Destination
Indicates the existing fields that match the fields of the file to
be imported.
If no match field is available, <IGNORE> is displayed. If a
field of the file to be imported matches an existing field, the
existing field name is displayed.
l The system automatically matches the fields in the file to
be imported with the fields provided by the U-Net. If a
field in the file to be imported does not match any field in
the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If a field in the file to be
imported matches a field in the U-Net, the field name in
the U-Net is displayed.
l You can click in the Destination row, and then manually
select a field from the drop-down list box to match the field
in the Source row.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Add
Delete
591
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Page
tab
page
Name
Orientation
Paper
Scaling
Margins
Com
pone
nts
tab
page
Map
Legend
Comments
Hea
der/
Foot
er
tab
page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates whether to add logos. you can add two logos at most.
l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.
l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is
displayed on the map.
You can click Properties to set the size of the logo. The size unit
is millimeter. You can also click File to select the file that
contains the logo.
592
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Title
Header/Footer
Prev
iew
area
Import
Export
Printer
Preview
NOTE
The default values of the preceding parameters vary with the templates.
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
593
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Indicates the starting row of In normal cases, the first row in the
the data for import. Data in imported file is a title. Therefore,
this row and the subsequent import the file from its second row.
rows is imported.
Field Separator
Height
Height of a receiver.
Gain
Gain of a receiver.
Loss
Network type.
Network Type
This parameter is
configurable only for a
multi-mode network.
Match Mode
l Select BCCH+BSIC
when DT files are
generated using the
Assistant or Probe, and
BCCH and BSIC in the
source DT files
uniquely identify a
GSM cell.
l Select LAC+CI when
DT files are generated
using the TEMS, and
LAC and CI in the
source DT files
uniquely identify a
GSM cell.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
594
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Config Columns
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
595
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
corresponding cells based on the
scrambling code.
Field
Mapping
Source
Destinati
on
Lazy Import
Delayed import.
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
596
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Field Separator
l <Tab>: Separates
fields with tab
characters.
l ,: Separates fields with
commas.
l ;: Separates fields with
semicolons.
l <Space>: Separates
fields with space
characters.
Reference
Cell
Receiver
Field
Mapping
Name
Frequenc
y
Height
Height of a receiver.
Gain
Gain of a receiver.
Loss
Source
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
597
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Destinati
on
Description
Remarks
Description
ID
Longitude
Latitude
Height(m)
Clutter
Clutter Height
Serving cell
Distance(m)
M(dBm)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
598
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
P(dBm)
Error(P-M)(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
599
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
No.
Name
Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
Button area
(4)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
600
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Value
Distance
area, where
data is
filtered
according to
the distance
between the
DT point
and the
serving cell
Min Distance
Max Distance
Measureme
nt area,
where data
is filtered
according to
the receive
level of the
DT point.
Min
Measurement
Max
Measurement
Azimuth
area, where
data is
filtered
according to
the cell
azimuth
Start Azimuth
End Azimuth
Add
Azimuth List
Remove
Select All/
Select None
Clutter area,
where data
is filtered
according to
the clutter
class.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
601
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Delete
Outside
Points
Description
Value
Description
Display Type
Field Type
Color
Min
Max
Legend
Fast Display
Add to Legend
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
602
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
11
This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.
Acronym/Abbreviation
Full Name
A
ACP
AMS
ARFCN
B
BCCH
BER
BLER
C
C/A
Carrier-to-Adjacent (Ratio)
C/I
Carrier-to-Interference (Ratio)
CDF
CM
Cubic Metric
CME
CW
Continuous Wave
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
DEM
DL
Downlink
DTM
DT
Drive Test
603
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Acronym/Abbreviation
Full Name
F
FDD
FTP
G
GIS
GUI
H
HARQ
HICH
HO
Handover
HR
Half Rate
HS-DSCH
HSN
HS-SCCH
I
ICIC
IoT
IP
Internet Protocol
IBCA
L
LTE
M
MBMS
MCS
MIMO
N
Ncs
Cyclic Shifts
NF
Noise Figure
O
OFDM
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
604
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Acronym/Abbreviation
Full Name
P
PN
Pseudo-Noise
PAPR
PBCH
PCFICH
PCI
Physical Cell ID
PDCCH
PDSCH
PHICH
PMCH
PRACH
PUCCH
PUSCH
Q
QAM
QPSK
R
RA
Random Access
RB
Resource Block
RE
Resource Element
RRM
RRU
RSCP
RSRP
RSRQ
RSSI
RxLev
RxQual
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
605
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Acronym/Abbreviation
Full Name
SC-FDMA
SFBC
SINR
Signal-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio
SPM
T
TA
Tracking Area
TCH
Traffic Channel
TCP
TDD
TMA
TS
Timeslot
TTI
TSC
U
UE
User Equipment
UL
Uplink
V
VAMOS
Z
ZC
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Zadoff-Chu Sequence
606